Users/philip/multimtr/chaps.dvi A_81534A A 81534A

User Manual: A_81534A

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 288

DownloadUsers/philip/multimtr/chaps.dvi A_81534A A 81534A
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Errata
Title & Document Type: 8153A Lightwave Multimeter Operating and Programming Manual
Manual Part Number: 08153-90011
Revision Date: September 1, 1999

HP References in this Manual
This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that HewlettPackard's former test and measurement, semiconductor products and chemical analysis
businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies. We have made no changes to this
manual copy. The HP XXXX referred to in this document is now the Agilent XXXX.
For example, model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A.
About this Manual
We’ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your
product. This manual provides the best information we could find. It may be incomplete
or contain dated information, and the scan quality may not be ideal. If we find a better
copy in the future, we will add it to the Agilent website.

Support for Your Product
Agilent no longer sells or supports this product. You will find any other available
product information on the Agilent Test & Measurement website:
www.tm.agilent.com
Search for the model number of this product, and the resulting product page will guide
you to any available information. Our service centers may be able to perform calibration
if no repair parts are needed, but no other support from Agilent is available.

Operating and Programming Manual
HP 8153A Lightwave Multimeter
SERIAL NUMBERS

This manual applies to all instruments with Serial No. 2946G00476 and higher.

ABCDE
HP Part No. 08153-90011
Printed in Germany
Third Edition
E0199

Notices

This document contains proprietary Warranty
information which is protected by
copyright. All rights are reserved. This Hewlett-Packard instrument
product is warranted against defects
in material and workmanship for a
No part of this document may be
period of one year from date of
photocopied, reproduced, or
shipment. During the warranty
translated to another language
without the prior written consent of period, HP will, at its option, either
repair or replace products which
Hewlett-Packard GmbH.
prove to be defective.
c Copyright 1999 by:
For warranty service or repair, this
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
product must be returned to a service
Herrenberger Str. 130
facility designated by HP. Buyer shall
7030 Boeblingen
prepay shipping charges to HP and
Germany
HP shall pay shipping charges to
Subject Matter
return the product to Buyer.
The information in this document is However, Buyer shall pay all shipping
charges, duties, and taxes for
subject to change without notice.
products returned to HP from
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty another country.
of any kind with regard to this
printed material, including, but not HP warrants that its software and
limited to, the implied warranties of rmware designated by HP for use
with an instrument will execute its
merchantability and tness for a
programming instructions when
particular purpose.
properly installed on that instrument.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable HP does not warrant that the
operation of the instrument,
for errors contained herein or for
incidental or consequential damages software, or rmware will be
in connection with the furnishing, uninterrupted or error free.
performance, or use of this material.

Printing History

Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are
Buyer's sole and exclusive remedies.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable
for any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential
damages whether based on contract,
tort, or any other legal theory.

Assistance
Product maintenance agreements
and other customer assistance
agreements are available for
Hewlett-Packard products. For any
assistance contact your nearest
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service
Oce. Addresses are provided at
the back of this manual.

Certi cation
Hewlett-Packard Company certi es
that this product met its published
speci cations at the time of
shipment from the factory.

Hewlett-Packard further certi es
that its calibration measurements
are traceable to the United States
National Institute of Standards and
Technology, NIST (formerly the
Limitation of Warranty
United States National Bureau of
Standards, NBS) to the extent
The foregoing warranty shall not
allowed by the Institutes's
apply to defects resulting from
improper or inadequate maintenance calibration facility, and to the
by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or calibration facilities of other
International Standards Organization
interfacing, unauthorized
members.
modi cation or misuse, operation
outside of the environmental
Control Serial Number
speci cations for the product, or
First Edition applies directly to all
improper site preparation or
instruments.
maintenance.

New editions are complete revisions
of the manual. Update packages,
contain additional and replacement
information to be incorporated into
the manual by the customer. The
date on the title page only changes
when a new manual is published.
When an edition is reprinted, all the
No other warranty is expressed or
prior updates to the edition are
implied. Hewlett-Packard speci cally
incorporated.
disclaims the implied warranties of
Merchantability and Fitness for a
Particular Purpose.

First Edition : E0590
Second Edition : E1191, E0492,
E1192, E1293
Third Edition : E1094, E0796, E0199

Safety Considerations

The Model HP 8153A is a Class 1 instrument (that is, an instrument with an
exposed metal chassis directly connected to earth via the power supply cable).
The symbol used to show a protective earth terminal in the instrument is
.
Before operation, you should review the instrument and manual, including the
red safety page, for safety markings and instructions. You must follow these to
ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in safe condition.
Some HP 8153A circuits are powered whenever the instrument is connected to
the AC power source. To disconnect from the line power, disconnect the power
cord either at the rear power-inlet or at the AC line-power source (receptacle).
One of these must always be accessible. If the instrument is in a cabinet, it must
be disconnected from the line power by the system's line-power switch.

Warning

To avoid hazardous electrical shock, do not perform
electrical tests when there are signs of shipping damage to
any portion of the outer enclosure (covers, panels, etc.).

Line Power Requirements

The HP 8153A can operate from any single-phase AC power source that supplies
between 100V and 240V at a frequency in the range from 40 to 60Hz. The
maximum power consumption is 55VA with all options installed.

The fuse used by this instrument is T1A / 250V (slow) (HP Part No. 2110-0007).
Changing the fuse should be carried out only by a quali ed electrician or by HP
service personnel as it is necessary to open the instrument.

Line Power Cable

In accordance with international safety standards, this instrument has
a three-wire power cable. When connected to an appropriate AC power
receptacle, this cable earths the instrument cabinet. The type of power cable
shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination. Refer to
Figure 0-1 for the part numbers of the power cables available.
iii

Figure 0-1. Line Power Cables - Plug Identi cation
To avoid the possibility of injury or death, you must
Warning
observe the following precautions before switching on the
instrument.
If this instrument is to be energized via an
autotransformer for voltage reduction, ensure that the
Common terminal connects to the earthed pole of the
power source.
Insert the power cable plug only into a socket outlet
provided with a protective earth contact. Do not negate
this protective action by the using an extension cord
without a protective conductor.
Before switching on the instrument, the protective
earth terminal of the instrument must be connected to a
protective conductor. You can do this by using the power
cord supplied with the instrument.
It is prohibited to interrupt the protective earth
connection intentionally.

iv

The following work should be carried out by a quali ed electrician, and all local
electrical codes must be strictly observed. If the plug on the cable does not t
the power outlet, or if the cable is to be attached to a terminal block, cut the
cable at the plug end and rewire it.
The color coding used in the cable depends on the cable supplied. If you are
connecting a new plug, it should meet the local safety requirements and include
the following features:
Adequate load-carrying capacity (see table of speci cations).
Ground connection.
Cable clamp.

Operating Environment
Warning

The HP 8153A is not designed for outdoor use. To prevent
potential re or shock hazard, do not expose the HP 8153A
to rain or other excessive moisture.

Input/Output Signals
Caution

A maximum of 15V can be applied as an external voltage to any
of the BNC connectors.

v

Initial Safety Information for Laser Source Modules
The Speci cations for these modules are as follows:

HP 81551MM HP 81552SM HP 81553SM HP 81554SM

Laser Type
Laser Class

According to IEC 825
(Europe)
According to 21 CFR 1040.10
(Canada, Japan, USA)

Output Power
Beam Diameter
Numerical Aperture
Wavelength

Note

FP-Laser
InGaAsP

FP-Laser
InGaAsP

FP-Laser
InGaAsP

Dual FP-Laser
InGaAsP

3A

3A

3A

3A

1

1

1

1

>-2dBm
50m

>0dBm
9m

>0dBm
9m

>-1dBm
9m

0.2
850610nm

0.1
1310620nm

0.1
0.1
1550620nm 1310/1550620nm

Canada, Japan, USA

The laser safety warning labels are xed on the laser module.

Note

Europe

A sheet of laser safety warning labels are included with the
laser module. You MUST stick the labels in the local language
vi

onto the outside of the mainframe, in a position where they are
clearly visible to anyone using the instrument.
You MUST return instruments with malfunctioning laser boxes to a HP Service
Center for repair and calibration.
The laser module has built in safety circuitry that will disable the optical output
in the case of a fault condition.

Warning

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those speci ed for the laser source
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Warning

Refer Servicing only to quali ed and authorized personnel.

Warning

Do not enable the laser when there is no ber attached to
the optical output connector.
The optical output connector is at the bottom, on the laser
module front panel.
The laser is enabled by pressing the grey button above the
optical output connector on the front panel. The laser is
enabled when the green LED on the front panel of the laser
module is lit.

Warning

Under no circumstances look into the end of an optical
cable attached to the optical output when the device is
operational.
The laser radiation is not visible to the human eye, but it
can seriously damage your eyesight.

vii

 Laser Quellen
Sicherheitsinformation fur

Die Spezi kationen fur
 die Lasereinschube
 sind wie folgt:

HP 81551MM HP 81552SM HP 81553SM HP 81554SM

Laser Typ
Laser Klasse

Entsprechend IEC 825
(Europa)

Ausgangsleistung
Strahldurchmesser
Numerische Apertur

Wellenlange

Hinweis

FP-Laser
InGaAsP

FP-Laser
InGaAsP

FP-Laser
InGaAsP

Dual FP-Laser
InGaAsP

3A

3A

3A

3A

>-2dBm
50m

>0dBm
9m

>0dBm
9m

>-1dBm
9m

0.2
850610nm

0.1
1310620nm

0.1
0.1
1550620nm 1310/1550620nm

Europa

Ein Blatt mit Laser Warnaufklebern ist jedem Lasereinschub
beigefugt.
 Die Aufkleber mussen

in der Landessprache, fur
 den
Anwender gut sichtbar, an der Aussenseite des Grundgerates

angebracht werden.
Defekte Lasereinschube
 mussen

zur Reparatur oder zur Kalibration an ein HP
Service Buro
 geschickt werden.
Der Lasereinschub hat eine eingebaute Sicherheitsschaltung die den
Laserausgang im Falle einer Storung

abschaltet.

viii

Warnung


Bedienung, Abgleicharbeiten oder die Durchfuhrung
von

Tests, die nicht im Handbuch angegeben sind, konnen
zum


Austritt gefahrlicher
Strahlung fuhren.

Warnung


Reparaturarbeiten durfen
nur von quali ziertem und

 werden.
bevollmachtigtem
Personal durchgefuhrt

Warnung

Laser nicht ohne angeschlossenen Glasfaserkabel
einschalten.
Der optische Ausgang be ndet sich am unteren Teil der

Einschubfrontplatte. Mit dem daruberliegenden
grauen
Druckschalter wird der Laser ein- bzw. ausgeschaltet. Bei
 Anzeige an der
eingeschaltetem Laser leuchtet eine grune
Frontplatte des Einschubes.

Warnung

Wenn der Laser eingeschaltet ist, darf unter keinen

Umstanden
in das Ende des optischen Kabels oder in den
 geschaut werden.
Laserausgang am Gerat
 das menschliche Auge unsichtbar,
Der Laserstrahl ist fur
 ernsthaft verletzen.
kann aber das Sehvermogen

ix


Informations et Consignes de Securit
e Relatives a l'Utilisation
des Lasers.
Les Speci
 cations des Modules Laser sont les Suivantes:

HP 81551MM HP 81552SM HP 81553SM HP 81554SM

Type de Laser
Classe du Laser

Conforme au STD IEC 825
(Europe)
Conforme au STD CFR 1040.10
(Canada, Japan, USA)

Puissance de Sortie
^ du Faisceau
Diametre

Ouverture Numerique
Longueur d'Onde

FP-Laser
InGaAsP

FP-Laser
InGaAsP

FP-Laser
InGaAsP

Dual FP-Laser
InGaAsP

3A

3A

3A

3A

1

1

1

1

>-2dBm
50m

>0dBm
9m

>0dBm
9m

>-1dBm
9m

0.2
850610nm

0.1
1310620nm

0.1
0.1
1550620nm 1310/1550620nm

Remarque Canada, Japan, USA

Les etiquettes de securit

e sont achees
 sur le module laser.

Remarque Europe

Les etiquettes

de securit

e sont incluses dans le module laser.
Il est obligatoire de coller une etiquette en langage local a
x

l'exterieur

de l'appareil de telle sorte qu'elle soit parfaitement
visible par l'utilisateur.
Il est obligatoire de retourner tout appareil presentant

un defaut

de fonctionnement du laser uniquement a un centre de reparation

Hewlett-Packard.
Le module laser comporte un systeme
 de securit

e mettant hors service la sortie
optique en cas de malfonctionnement du laser.

Attention

L'utilisation du laser en dehors de ses limites de

performances et des procedures
de nies par HP peut

conduire a une exposition dangereuse de l'utilisateur aux
radiations.

Attention

Seul le personnel autorise par HP est quali e pour
intervenir sur le laser.

Attention

^ assure
Ne pas mettre le laser sous tension sans s'etre
 sur le connecteur.
qu'une bre optique est bien xee
Le connecteur de sortie optique est situe au bas de la face
avant du module laser.
La mise en service du laser s'e ectue par la pression du
bouton gris situe au dessus de la sortie optique en face
avant du module. L'illumination de la LED verte indique que
le laser est en activite.

Attention

 e de la bre
En aucun cas ne tenter de regarder l'extremit

optique attachee au connecteur lorsque le laser est en
activite.
 emise

Bien que la lumiere
par le laser ne soit pas visible elle
^ dangereuse pour la vue.
peut cependant etre

xi


Lasersakerhet

Till HP 8153A optiska matsystem

kan man installera en lasermodul. Padetta

vis kan HP 8153A optiska matsystem

ocksa vara en laserapparat, som da
klassi ceras till laserklass 3A.
I Finland har apparatens lasersakerhet

inspekterats av Institutet for

Arbetshygien och typgodkants
 av Arbetsskydstyrelsen. Vid inspektionen har
apparaten klassi cerats enligt de bestammelser

som anges i statsradets

beslut Nr.
472/1985 och standard SFS-IEC 825.
Om man till HP 8153A matsystem

har anlagt en lasermodul eller om man senare
installerar en lasermodul, maste
 till apparaten bifogas varningsskyltar enligt
standard SFS-IEC 825:

Bruksanvisningar
Varning

 pa annat satt
 an
 vad i
Om apparaten anvands



bruksanvisningar speci cerats, kan anvandaren
utsattas
for

osynlig laserstralning
av laserklass 3A.

Vid anvandingen

av apparaten bor
 foljande

varningsanvisningar efterfoljas,

som
pa detta satt
 garanterar sakerhet.

Aktivera ej lasern, om inte den optiska kapeln ar
 kopplad till stral oppningen.

Laserstralen
 aktiveras genom att trycka pa den graa
 knoppen ovanfor

stral oppningen.

Darefter

informerar den grona
 indikationslampan om att
lasern ar
 i funktion.
xii

Titta aldrig in i den till stral oppningen

kopplade optiska kabeln eller berns
losa
 del, nar
 lasern ar
 i funktion.


Underhall

I apparaten nns ej sadana

delar, som anvandaren

kan underhalla.

Nar
 man
upptacker

att fel i apparaten har uppstatt
 eller att apparaten ej fungerar
felfritt, bor
 apparaten sandas

till HP:s verkstad for
 reparering och service.
I lasermodulen nns en inbyggd sakerhetskrets,

som satter

laserstralningen

ur
funktion nar
 fel uppstar
 i apparaten.

xiii

Laserturvallisuus

HP 8153A optiseen yleismittariin voidaan asentaa pistoyksikkon
 a laserlahde.

Tall
 oin
 HP 8153A optinen yleismittari toimii laserlaitteena joka kuuluu
turvalisuusluokkaan 3A.
Laitteen on tarkastanut Suomessa laserturvallisuuden osalta Tyoterveyslaitos

ja
tyypihyvaksynyt

Tyosuojeluhallitus.

Tarkastuksessa laitteen turvallisuusluokka
on ma aritetty

valtioneuvoston pa at
 oksen

N:o 472/1985 ja standardin SFS-IEC
825 mukaisesti.
Mikali
 HP 8153A mittauslaitteeseenne on asennettu laserlahde

tai siihen
myohemmin

asennetaan em. laserlahde,

laite on varustettava laserlahteen

mukana toimitettavilla, standardin SFS-IEC 825 mukaisilla varoitusmerkinnoill
 a:


 o
Kaytt
Varoitus

 aminen

 oohjeesa

Laitteen kaytt
muulla kuin kaytt
mainitulla
 aj an
 luokan 3A nakym
 att
 om
 alle

tavalla saattaa altistaa kaytt

lasersateilylle.

Kaytt
 aess
 asi
 laitetta noudata seuraavia varo-ohjeita, jotka takaavat laitteen
turvallisen kayt
 on:

al
 a aktivoi lasersadett

a,
 ellei optinen kaapeli ole kytkettyna sateen

ulostuloliittimeen. Lasersade
 aktivoidaan painamalla ulostuloliittimen
ylapuolelle

sijoitettua harmaata kytkinta.
 Tall
 oin
 vihrea merkkivalo ilmaisee
lasersateen

toimivan.
xiv

al
 a koskaan katso ulostuloliittimeen kytketyn optisen kaapelin tai kuidun
sisa an
 sen vapaana olevasta pa ast
 a,
 kun laite on toiminnassa.

Huolto

Laitteessa ei ole kaytt
 aj an
 huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laite tulee lahett

a a
korjattavaksi ja huollettavaksi HP:n huoltokorjaamoon, mikali
 laite vikaantuu
tai sen havaitaan toimivan virheellisesti.
Laserlahteess

a on myos
 sisa anrakennettu

turvapiiri, joka esta a lasersateen

toiminnan laitteen vikaantuessa.

xv

Introduction

This manual is arranged into four categories:
Getting Started
Descriptions of operating principles, to make you familiar with the
instrument. Chapter 1.
Quick Reference Guide
Local control and remote control programming information. Chapters 2, 3, 4,
5, 6, 7, 8, and 9.
Reference Data
Supporting information of a non-operational nature. Appendix A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, and I.
Customer Assistance
Sales and Service information. Appendix J.

xvi

Contents
1. Getting Started

The HP 8153A System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Quick Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Sample Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching On and Recalling the Standard Setting
Making A Power Measurement . . . . . . . . .
Logging Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examining the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Measure Mode

The Chan Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Mode Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Param Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entry Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Disp!Ref Key . . . . . . . . . . . .
The dB Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using 4dB5 with a Two Sensor Instrument
Using 4dB5 with a One Sensor Instrument

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

1-1
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-6
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-11
1-12
1-13

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-9

Contents-1

The dBm/W Key . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Zero Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The N Dig Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Range Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Auto Key . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Up Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Down Key . . . . . . . . . . .
The Analog Output . . . . . . . . .
The Modify Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Discrete Valued Parameters . .
Editing Continuous Valued Parameters
Editing Units . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2-9
2-9
2-11
2-11
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14

The Chan Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Mode Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The System Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Modify Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Loss Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Loss Application . . . . . .
The Record Key . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Stability Application . . . . . . . . .
T TOTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTODUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Stability Application . . . .
The Logging Application . . . . . . . . .
SAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTODUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THRESHLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Logging Application . . . .
The Manual Logging Application . . . . .
Running the Manual Logging Application
The Plot Application . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOSCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y MIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Plot Application . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-16

3. Menu Mode

Contents-2

Reading the Plot . . . . . . . . .
The Print Application . . . . . . .
AUTOSCAL . . . . . . . . . . .
Y MIN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Y MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMENT . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Print Application . .
Reading the Printout . . . . . . .
The MinMax Applications . . . . .
MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the MinMax Application .
The More Key . . . . . . . . . . .
The Show Application . . . . . . .
MAXIMUM . . . . . . . . . . .
MINIMUM . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AVERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . .
#1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Alignment Application . . . . .
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . .
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAXPOWER . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Alignment Application

4. System Mode

The Mode Key . . . .
The Modify Keys . . .
The System Key . . .
RECALL . . . . .
The Module Type
The Location . .
The Channel . . .
STORE . . . . . .
The Module Type
The Channel . . .
The Location . .
HPIB . . . . . . .
ADDRESS . . . .
MODE . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-16
3-19
3-20
3-20
3-21
3-21
3-22
3-22
3-25
3-27
3-27
3-27
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-31
3-31

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6

Contents-3

LANGUAGE
DISPLAY . .
BRIGHT . .
DATETIME .
MM/DD/YY
HH:MM:SS .

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

4-6
4-7
4-7
4-7
4-8
4-8

Introduction . . . . . . . . . .
The HP 8153A HP-IB Capabilities
HP-IB Display Indicators . . . .
The Parser . . . . . . . . . .
Parser Type . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization . . . . . . .
Clearing the Input Queue . . .
Accepted Characters . . . . .
HP-IB Bus Commands . . . .
HP-IB Priority . . . . . . . . .
TMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the HP-IB Address . . .
Syntax Diagram Conventions . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-8
5-9

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

6-1
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14

5. Programming the HP 8153A

6. Common Commands

Common Status Information
SRQ, The Service Request
Input Queue . . . . . . .
Output Queue . . . . . .
Error Queue . . . . . . .
*CLS . . . . . . . . . .
*ESE . . . . . . . . . .
*ESE? . . . . . . . . . .
*ESR? . . . . . . . . . .
*IDN? . . . . . . . . . .
*OPC . . . . . . . . . .
*OPC? . . . . . . . . .
*OPT? . . . . . . . . .
*RST . . . . . . . . . .
*SRE . . . . . . . . . .
*SRE? . . . . . . . . . .
*STB? . . . . . . . . . .
*TRG . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-4

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

*TST? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. HP-IB Status Commands

The Status Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Condition Registers . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Transition Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Event Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Enable Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Status Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STATus:PRESet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STATus::CONDition? . . . . . . . . . .
STATus::ENABle . . . . . . . . . . . .
STATus::ENABle? . . . . . . . . . . .
STATus:[:EVENt]? . . . . . . . . . . .
STATus::NTRansition . . . . . . . . . .
STATus::NTRansition? . . . . . . . . .
STATus::PTRansition . . . . . . . . . .
STATus::PTRansition? . . . . . . . . .
The Operation Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Operation Status Commands . . . . . . . .
The OPERation node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The OPERation:SETTling Node . . . . . . . . .
The OPERation:SETTling:LPELTier Node . . .
The OPERation:SETTling:HPELTier Node . . .
The OPERation:MEASuring Node . . . . . . . .
The OPERation:MEASuring:POWer Node . . .
The OPERation:TRIGger Node . . . . . . . . .
The OPERation:TRIGger:POWer Node . . . . .
The OPERation:CORRecting Node . . . . . . . .
The OPERation:CORRecting:ZERO Node . . . .
The OPERation:AVERaging Node . . . . . . . .
The OPERation:AVERaging:POWer Node . . . .
The OPERation:PROGram Node . . . . . . . . .
The OPERation:PROGram: Node .
The Questionable Status . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Questionable Status Commands . . . . . . .
The QUEStionable node . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The QUEStionable:POWer Node . . . . . . . . .
The QUEStionable:POWer:OVERRange Node . .
The QUEStionable:POWer:LCURRent Node . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

6-14
6-14
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-7
7-7
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-11
7-11
7-11
7-11
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-12
7-13
7-13
7-13
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-17
7-17

Contents-5

The QUEStionable:POWer:HCURRent Node . . . . . . . . .
The QUEStionable:POWer:LMONitor Node . . . . . . . . . .
The QUEStionable:POWer:HMONitor Node . . . . . . . . . .
The QUEStionable:POWer:ENVTemp Node . . . . . . . . . .
The QUEStionable:ISUMmary Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The QUEStionable:ISUMmary:INSTrument[1j2] Node . . . . .
The QUEStionable:ISUMmary:INSTrument[1j2]:POWer Node
The Source Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Source Status Commands The following are the source status
The SOURce node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. HP-IB Commands

ABORt Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ABORt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPlay Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPlay:BRIGhtness . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPlay:BRIGhtness? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPlay:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISPlay:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FETCh Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer[:DC] . . . . . . . . . .
INITiate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITiate:CONTinuous . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITiate:CONTinuous? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITiate[:IMMediate] . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
READ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
READ[:SCALar]:POWer[:DC] . . . . . . . . . .
SENSe Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SENSe:CORRection:COLLect:ZERO . . . . . . .
SENSe:CORRection:COLLect:ZERO? . . . . . . .
SENSe:CORRection[:LOSS[:INPut[:MAGNitude]]] .
SENSe:CORRection[:LOSS[:INPut[:MAGNitude]]]?
SENSe:POWer:ATIME . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SENSe:POWer:ATIME? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SENSe:POWer:RANGe:AUTO . . . . . . . . . .
SENSe:POWer:RANGe:AUTO? . . . . . . . . .

Contents-6

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

7-18
7-18
7-18
7-18
7-19
7-19
7-19
7-20
7-20
7-21
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-4
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-7
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-8
8-9
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-11
8-12
8-12
8-13
8-13
8-13

SENSe:POWer:RANGe[:UPPER] . . . .
SENSe:POWer:RANGe[:UPPER]? . . .
SENSe:POWer:REFerence . . . . . .
SENSe:POWer:REFerence? . . . . . .
SENSe:POWer:REFerence:DISPlay . .
SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe . . .
SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe? . . .
SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe:RATIo
SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe:RATIo?
SENSe:POWer:UNIT . . . . . . . . .
SENSe:POWer:UNIT? . . . . . . . . .
SENSe:POWer:WAVElength . . . . . .
SENSe:POWer:WAVElength? . . . . .
SOURce Commands . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Channel . . . . . . . .
SOURce:AM[:INTernal]:FREQuency . .
SOURce:AM[:INTernal]:FREQuency? .
SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation . . . . .
SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation? . . . . .
SOURce:POWer:STATe . . . . . . . .
SOURce:POWer:STATe? . . . . . . . .
SOURce:POWer:WAVElength . . . . .
SOURce:POWer:WAVElength? . . . . .
SYSTem Commands . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTem:DATE . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTem:DATE? . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTem:ERRor? . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTem:TIME . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTem:TIME? . . . . . . . . . . .

9. HP-IB Application Commands

Program Commands . . . . . .
PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute
PROGram[:SELected]:NAME .
PROGram[:SELected]:NAME? .
PROGram[:SELected]:NUMBer
PROGram[:SELected]:NUMBer?
PROGram[:SELected]:STATe .
PROGram[:SELected]:STATe? .
Mainframe Applications . . . .
The Logging Application . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

8-14
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-20
8-20
8-21
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-23
8-23
8-24
8-24
8-24
8-25
8-25
8-26
8-26
8-27
8-27
8-27
8-28
8-29

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

9-1
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-5
9-5

Contents-7

The Stability Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10. HP-IB Programming Examples
Example 1 .
Example 2 .
Example 3 .
Example 4 .
Example 5 .
Example 6 .
Example 7 .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 10-2
. 10-3
. 10-5
. 10-7
. 10-10
. 10-13
. 10-15

Safety Considerations . . . .
Initial Inspection . . . . . . .
Line Power Requirements . .
Line Power Cable . . . . .
Operating Environment . . .
Temperature . . . . . . . .
Humidity . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cooling . . . .
Input/Output Signals . . . .
HP-IB Interface . . . . . . .
Cables and Adapters . . . .
Connector . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Logic Levels . . . . .
Removing and Fitting Modules
How to Remove a Module .
How to Fit a Module . . . .
Storage and Shipment . . . .
Claims and Repackaging . . .
Return Shipments to HP . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

A-1
A-2
A-2
A-2
A-4
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-6
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
A-10

Mainframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Interfaces and Other Accessories . . . . . . . . . . .

B-1
B-2
B-3

A. Installation

B. Accessories

Contents-8

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

9-6

C. Speci cations

Mainframe Speci cations . . . .
Declaration of Conformity . . .
Supplementary Information:
Acoustic Noise Emission . . .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

C-1
C-3
C-4
C-5

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruments Speci cations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IA. Function Test Using the HP 81533A . . . . . . . .
Display Function and Module Interface Tests . . . .
Display Function Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Interface Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ANALOG INPUT (8152A IN) . . . . . . . . . . . .
P.CTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IB. Function Test using a HP 81530/31/32 or HP 81536A
HP-IB Interface Test (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

D-1
D-1
D-2
D-2
D-2
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-4
D-6
D-6
D-6
D-7

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

E-1
E-2
E-2
E-3
E-3
E-3
E-4

Measure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

F-1
F-2
F-3

D. Function Tests

E. Cleaning Procedures

Cleaning Materials . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Fiber/Front-Panel Connectors
Cleaning Connector Interfaces . . . .
Cleaning Connector Bushings . . . . .
Cleaning Detector Windows . . . . .
Cleaning Lens Adapters . . . . . . .
Cleaning Detector Lens Interfaces . .

F. Local Control Summary

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Contents-9

G. HP 8153A HP-IB Command Summary

The Logging Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Stability Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H. HP 8152A HP-IB Command Summary

Di erences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the FETCh Command - An Example .
Setting the Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Listener Function . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Parameter Set . . . . . . . .
Talker Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrogating Settings . . . . . . . . .
Status/Error Reporting . . . . . . . . .
Universal Commands . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

H-1
H-3
H-4
H-5
H-5
H-7
H-8
H-8
H-10
H-10

Local Operation Error Codes . . . . . . . . .
Module Related Errors . . . . . . . . . . .
Speci c Error Identi ers . . . . . . . . . .
Store and Recall Errors . . . . . . . . . . .
Plot, Print, Show, and Manual Logging Errors
Loss Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Speci c Errors . . . . . . . . .
Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Execution Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Dependant Errors . . . . . . . . . .
Query Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

I-1
I-1
I-2
I-2
I-2
I-2
I-3
I-3
I-3
I-3
I-4
I-6
I-7
I-8

Instruments with Serial Numbers 2946G00475 and Earlier
Instruments with Serial Numbers 2946G00225 and Earlier
The Print Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

K-1
K-2
K-2
K-2
K-2

I. Error Codes

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

G-4
G-5

J. Sales and Service Oces
K. Backdating

Contents-10

Index

Contents-11

Figures
0-1.
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
6-1.
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
7-4.

Line Power Cables - Plug Identi cation . . . . . . . . .
The HP 8153A System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The HP 8153A Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The HP 8153A Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Set Up for the Sample Session . . . . . . . .
The Display at the Start of the Sample Session . . . . . .
Editing the Sensor Wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading the Power Output by the Source . . . . . . . .
Going into Menu Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Plotter Connected to the HP 8153A . . . . . . . . . .
Measurements with TAverage  1 second . . . . . . . . .
Editing the Averaging Time Parameter . . . . . . . . .
The Display while Channel A is Being Zeroed . . . . . .
Measuring the Reference for the Loss Application . . . .
Measuring the Loss of a Device Under Test (DUT) . . . .
The Loss Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup for a Record Application . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an Application : Stability . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing an Application Parameter : Samples . . . . . . .
Stability Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logging Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Window and Refresh Modes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup for an Alignment Application . . . . . . . . . . .
The Display during the Alignment Application . . . . . .
Making a Selection in System Mode : the Recall Function
Editing a Parameter in System Mode . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Brightness of the Display . . . . . . . . . .
Common Status Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Registers and Filters in a Node . . . . . . . . . . .
The Operation Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Questionable Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Source Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-12

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

iv
1-1
1-2
1-6
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-13
2-4
2-4
2-10
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-11
3-18
3-23
3-26
3-30
3-32
4-2
4-4
4-7
6-2
7-1
7-8
7-14
7-20

8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
A-1.
A-2.
A-3.
A-4.

Measurements with TAverage  1 second . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurements with TAverage > 1 second, continuous triggering.
Measurements with TAverage > 1 second, immediate triggering.
Line Power Cables - Plug Identi cation . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Remove a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fitting a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

8-5
8-5
8-6
A-4
A-6
A-8
A-9

Contents-13

Tables
1-1.
2-1.
2-2.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
6-4.
6-5.
6-6.
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
8-6.
8-7.
8-8.
8-9.
9-1.
G-1.
G-2.

Description of the Display . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accepted Characters . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Bus Commands . . . . . . . . . .
Common Command Summary . . . . . . .
The Standard Event Status Enable Register
The Standard Event Status Register . . . .
Reset State (Standard Setting) . . . . . .
The Service Request Enable Register . . .
The Status Byte Register . . . . . . . . .
STATus Command Summary . . . . . . .
STATus Command Summary . . . . . . .
STATus Command Summary . . . . . . .
ABORt Command Summary . . . . . . .
DISPlay Command Summary . . . . . . .
FETCh Command Summary . . . . . . .
INITiate Command Summary . . . . . . .
READ Command Summary . . . . . . . .
SENSe Command Summary . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOURce Command Summary . . . . . . .
SYSTem Command Summary . . . . . . .
PROGram Command Summary . . . . . . .
STATus Command Summary . . . . . . .
STATus Command Summary . . . . . . .

Contents-14

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

1-6
2-6
2-12
5-2
5-4
5-5
6-4
6-5
6-7
6-11
6-12
6-13
7-9
7-15
7-21
8-1
8-2
8-4
8-7
8-8
8-10
8-15
8-22
8-26
9-2
G-8
G-9

1

1
Getting Started
This chapter introduces the features of the HP 8153A and gives you an
opportunity to familiarize yourself with the way you operate the instrument.

The HP 8153A System

The central element of the system is the HP 8153A mainframe. You customize
the instrument using plug-in modules and a changeable ber-connector
interfaces.

Figure 1-1. The HP 8153A System

Getting Started 1-1

1

A Quick Overview
The Keyboard

Most of the keys have two functions, depending on the selected mode. Di erent
colors, or whether the legend is on the key or above it, show these di erent
functions.

Figure 1-2. The HP 8153A Keyboard
The 4Chan5 key, the 4Mode5 key, and the modify keys always have the same
function.
4Chan5
Select the channel. The other keys act only on the selected
channel. Channel A corresponds to the module in the left slot.
Channel B corresponds to the module in the right slot.
4Mode5
Switch between Measure and Menu Mode.
Modify
4(5, 4)5
Select the digit or character to edit.
Keys
Edit the selected digit or character, or the parameter.
4+5, 4*5
Measure Mode

Measure mode is the mode selected automatically when you switch on the
instrument. In this mode you can set up and make simple measurements. In
measure mode, the black writing on the key shows its function.
4Param5
Select the measurement-parameter that you want to view or edit.
1-2 Getting Started

1

!Ref5

Measure and record the input power-level for use as a reference.
4dB5
Display the input power-level relative to a reference.
4dBm/W5
Switch between dBm and Watt units.
4Zero5
Measure the electrical noise in the instrument, and compensate for
it.
4N Dig5
Select the number of decimal places shown in the result.
Range Keys 4Auto5
Start or stop automatic ranging.
4Up5
Select the next higher measuring range.
Select the next lower measuring range.
4Down5
4Disp

Menu Mode

In this mode there are pre-programmed routines to perform some common, but
more complicated, measurements. In menu mode, the blue writing above the
key shows the function of the key.
There are some keys whose operation is common to all of the tasks you do in
menu mode.
4Edit5 gives you access to the parameters for editing.
4Prev5 and 4Next5 step through the items in a menu. For example, these can be
di erent types of Record applications, or the di erent parameters for the
system con guration.
4Exec5 to execute an application, or to nish editing a change of a system
parameter.
4Pause5 to pause the running application or to continue a paused application.
4System5
Select system-parameters. This allows you to view or edit the
con guration of the instrument.
4Loss5
Select the Loss application. A loss measurement tells you how
much of your optical signal you lose by passing it through a device.
Loss is calculated by the following formula:
Loss = 10log(

Pout
)dB
Pin

To measure loss you need both quantities, Pin and Pout . The
application records Pin when you start the application. The
instrument expresses all the following results relative to this.
These results are loss results.
Getting Started 1-3

1

4Record5

4More5

Select from the Stability, Logging, Manual Logging, Plot or Print
applications.
Stability takes samples at evenly spaced intervals for a speci ed
period.
The parameters for this application are
T_TOTAL
Which sets the total time over which the
measurements are to be made.
AUTODUMP Which sets whether the results are output to a
printer or plotter when the application nishes.
Logging takes a speci ed number of samples one immediately
after the other. That is, as soon as the rst sample has ended,
the second starts.
The parameters for this application are
SAMPLES
Which sets the number of samples to be taken.
AUTODUMP Which sets whether the results are output to a
printer or plotter when the application nishes.
START
Which sets whether the application starts
immediately, or only after the power goes above, or
below, a speci ed threshold level.
THRESHLD Which sets the threshold level to be passed before
the application begins.
Manual Logging takes a sample each time the user presses the
4Exec5 key.
In addition, the plot and print applications allow you to make
a graphics plot, or a printout from the samples of your record
application.
The parameters for the plot and print applications are
AUTOSCAL Which sets whether the axes are scaled automatically
or not.
Y_MIN
Which sets the minimum value for the y-axis.
Y_MAX
Which sets the maximum value for the y-axis.
COMMENT
Which allows you to add your own text to the
printout or plot.
Select from the other applications. As standard, the instrument has
Show and Alignment applications.

1-4 Getting Started

1

The Show application lets you look at the sample values from the
most recent Stability, Logging, or Manual Logging application.
Some simple statistics for the results are also given.
The Alignment application gives you visual, and audible
feedback of the input power, to help you align two components
for the maximum transfer of optical power.
The parameters for this application are
TYPE
Which sets whether the maximum transferred
power is determined automatically by the
instrument, or set manually by the user.
DELTA
Which sets the size of the change in transferred
power indicated on the display, or by the tone.
MAXPOWER Which sets expected, or required, maximum
transferred power.
The 4Pause5 key switches on and o the tone.

Getting Started 1-5

1

The Display

The display shows the status and the readings.

Figure 1-3. The HP 8153A Display
Table 1-1. Description of the Display
Description
1 Ch annel Indicator
Shows the selected channel.
2 Mode Indicator
Shows the operating mode.
Shows the state of the HP-IB communications.
3 Communications
Indicator
NNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNN

RMT

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

TLK ONLY

NNNNNNNNNNN

SRQ

4 Low Batt ery
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Indicator

1-6 Getting Started

Remote communications are taking place.
Talk-only selected for the HP-IB.
A service request is pending.
Indicates that the internal battery voltage is
low.

1
Table 1-1. Description of the Display (continued)
Description
5 Result Field
This is where the results of tests or
6 Reference Indicator
A/REF or
B/REF
A/B or B/A

7 Bar Graph

8 Operation Indicator
AUTO
APPL
EDIT
RUN
PAUSE

9 Param eter Indicator
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN


CAL
T
REF
ATT
AUX

10 Character Field

applications are shown.
Shows the reference used for a dB result.
Results relative to a reference.

Results relative to the other channel.
Gives a linear graphical representation of the
result.
Shows the operation type.
The range is being selected automatically.
An application has been selected.
An application parameter is being edited.
An application is running.
An application has been temporarily halted.
shows the type of parameter in the character
eld.
Character eld shows wavelength.
Character eld shows the calibration factor.
Character eld shows the averaging time.
Character eld shows the reference level.
Character eld shows the attenuation of the
source.
Auxiliary Parameters.
Used for parameters, and error messages.

Getting Started 1-7

1

A Sample Session

In this sample session you recall the standard setting, take a power
measurement, and then do some data logging.

Hardware Setup

Figure 1-4. Hardware Set Up for the Sample Session
This session assumes that you have a multimeter con gured with one source and
one sensor module. The source module is in channel B and the sensor module is
in channel A. Attach the source to the sensor with a piece of optic ber. At the
start of the session, make sure that the instrument is o .

Switching On and Recalling the Standard Setting
1. Set up the instrument as described above.
2. Switch on the instrument. All the display lights, and then the message
SELFTEST shows in the character eld in both channels. The following are
the default power on conditions.
The current channel is channel A.
The instrument is in measure mode.
The source is inactive.
The sensor is reading the optical power at its input. Autoranging is
enabled.
1-8 Getting Started

1

Figure 1-5. The Display at the Start of the Sample Session
3. Press 4Mode5. The instrument goes to menu mode. It shows the MENU mode
indicator at the top of the display and the word MENU in the character eld
at the bottom of the display.
4. Press 4System5. The instrument goes into system mode, it shows the MENU SYS
mode indicator. The character eld shows the message RECALL. The rest of
the display is o .
5. Press 4Edit5. The instrument shows the MENU SYS EDIT mode indicator and
the message RECALL 0! A shows in the character eld.
6. Press 4Exec5 to recall the standard setting for channel A. The RUN operation
indicator shows while the setting is being recalled.
7. Press 4*5. The instrument shows the message RECALL 0! B in the
character eld.
8. Press 4Exec5 to recall the standard setting for channel B.
9. Press 4Mode5 to return the instrument to measure mode.

Making A Power Measurement
Note

Normally, the instrument is left for 20 minutes to warm up.
Maximum accuracy is only possible if the instrument is allowed
to warm up. For this sample session we do not need this
accuracy, so you can go to the next step immediately.

Getting Started 1-9

1

10. Press 4Param5 until the  parameter indicator for channel A lights. The
character eld on the left hand side now shows the wavelength for the
sensor. The wavelength of the source shows in the result eld on the right
side. Set the wavelength of the sensor to the wavelength of the source.
Use 4(5 and 4)5 to select a modi able digit. The modi able digit blinks. Use
4*5 and 4+5 to alter the value of this digit.

Figure 1-6. Editing the Sensor Wavelength
11. Press 4Zero5 to remove any electrical o sets in the circuitry. The message
ZEROING is shown in the character eld and ---- shows blinking in the
result eld.
12. Enable the source by pressing the button on its front panel. The green LED
lights to show that the source is now active.
13. The instrument shows the power of the source in the result eld of channel
A, in Watts.

1-10 Getting Started

1

Figure 1-7. Reading the Power Output by the Source

Logging Data

You will now set up the instrument to record 250 consecutive power readings.
The instrument starts this part with the settings used after the section \Making
a Power Measurement".
14. Press 4Menu5 to change to menu mode. The mode indicator changes to show
MENU. MENU is displayed in the character eld.

Figure 1-8. Going into Menu Mode
15. Press 4Record5 to choose a record application. The APPL operation indicator
switches on. The character eld shows STABILTY. Press 4Record5 again, so
that the character eld shows LOGGING.
Getting Started 1-11

1

16. Press 4Edit5, the EDIT operation indicator lights and the character eld on
the left shows SAMPLES. The other character eld shows the setting for the
number of samples to be taken.
Use the Modify keys to set the number of samples to 250.
17. Press 4Next5, the character eld shows AUTODUMP. Make sure that it is OFF. If
it is not, use 4*5 or 4+5 to switch it OFF.
18. Press 4Next5. The character eld shows START Use 4*5 or 4+5 to set the state
to IMMEDIAT. This means that the logging starts immediately when you
execute it.
19. Press 4Edit5 again to get back to the display with LOGGING in the character
eld.
You have now set the parameters for the application. The application takes
a just under a minute to record the values. While it is running try moving
and twisting the ber to change the power received at the sensor.
20. Press 4Exec5 to start the application. The instrument shows the RUN operation
indicator. While the application is running, the character eld shows the
number of the sample that is being taken. When the application nishes,
the RUN indicator goes out.

Examining the Data

After you have run the Logging application, you can look at the data that has
been recorded. You do this using the Show application.
21. Press 4More5. The character eld shows the word SHOW.
22. Press 4Edit5. The character eld now shows MAXIMUM and the value of the
highest reading taken during the logging.
23. Press 4Next5. The character eld now shows MINIMUM and the value of the
lowest reading taken during the logging.
24. Press 4Next5. The character eld shows DIFF and the di erence between the
highest and lowest readings.
25. Press 4Next5. The character eld shows AVERAGE and the average of the
readings.
26. Press 4Next5. The character eld shows # 1 and the value of the rst reading.
To examine all the readings, use the 4*5 and 4+5.
1-12 Getting Started

1

27. When you have nished examining the readings, press 4Edit5 to get back to
the display with SHOW in the character eld.

Plotting Data

Now that you have recorded the data, you can plot it on a plotter using the
Hewlett-Packard|Interface Bus (HP-IB).
28. Attach the instrument to a graphics-plotter that has HP-GL capabilities.
Attach the plotter to the HP-IB connector. Do not attach any other device
to this connector at the same time as the plotter. Make sure that the plotter
is con gured at address 5.
29. Make sure that the instrument is in Talk Only mode. When the instrument
is in Talk Only mode, the TLK ONLY shows at the top of the display. If the
instrument is not in Talk Only mode use the following procedure to put it
into Talk Only mode
a. Press 4System5 repeatedly until HPIB shows in the character eld.
b. Press 4Edit5. The character eld shows the message ADDRESS and the
HP-IB address of the HP 8153A.
c. Press 4Next5. The character eld shows the message MODE. The word
TLK LSTN is blinking.
d. Use the modify keys to set the HP-IB state to TLK ONLY.
e. Press 4Edit5 to return to the display with HPIB in the character eld.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure 1-9. A Plotter Connected to the HP 8153A
Getting Started 1-13

1

30. Press 4Record5 repeatedly, until the message PLOT shows in the character
eld.
31. Press 4Edit5. The character eld shows AUTOSCAL. Use the modify keys to set
this parameter to ON. This means that the instrument automatically scales
the plot.
32. Press 4Next5. The character eld shows COMMENT. The comment is a message
that prints on the plot. Use the modify keys to enter a comment. Use 4(5
and 4)5 to select a character position in your comment. Use 4*5 to select a
letter and 4+5 to select a number for your comment.
33. Press 4Edit5 to get back to the display with PLOT in the character eld.
34. Press 4Exec5 to plot the readings.
The RUN Mode indicator shows while the graph of the results plots. When the
plot has nished the RUN indicator switches o .
This ends the sample session.

1-14 Getting Started

2
Measure Mode
The default mode at switch-on is Measure Mode. When the instrument is in
measure mode, the mode-indicator shows MEAS. In measure mode, the function
of key is shown by the black legend on the key.

The Chan Key

4Chan5 selects the channel. This can be A or B. The channel- indicator, at the top
of the display, shows the selected channel.

Note

Functions in Measure mode apply only to the selected channel.

When the instrument is under remote operation, this key acts as 4Local5. That is,
it returns the instrument to local operation (unless Local Lockout is active).

The Mode Key

changes the operating mode. If you press this key in measure mode, it
changes the instrument into menu mode (the next chapter gives a description of
menu mode).
4Mode5

Note

The commands described in this chapter can only be used when
the instrument is in Measure mode.

Local Control - Measure Mode 2-1

2

2

The Param Key

Use 4Param5 to select a measurement-parameters for editing. The parameterindicator shows the selected parameter, the character eld shows the value of
the parameter. You can select the next parameter by pressing 4Param5 again.
When the hardware does not use a particular parameter, you cannot select it.
When you have selected a parameter, you can edit it using the Modify keys
(described later in this chapter). Some parameters are set by the instrument,
these cannot be edited.
The Applications in Menu mode also use the parameters set in Measure mode.

Entry Status

When you select a parameter, the editable part blinks. The editable part can be
one digit or character, or the whole parameter. You can only edit a parameter, or
a part of a parameter, while it is blinking.
If you do not press any more keys within 10 seconds, the blinking stops and you
are prevented from editing the value. You can enable editing again if you press
any of the Modify keys.

Note

The instrument holds the parameter information in memory
until you edit it. Switching the instrument o does not a ect
the parameters.

Default Values
If you hold down 4Param5 for 2 seconds or longer, the parameter is set to its
default value.

Parameter List

The parameters and their speci cations are as follows:


This is the wavelength value. Sometimes, you can set the wavelength to any
value within limits set by the module (for example, for a power sensor). For
other modules, you can choose one wavelength from two possibilities (for
2-2 Local Control - Measure Mode

example, multi-wavelength sources). In other cases, the module sets this value
and you can display the value but you cannot edit it.
Display Format nnnn.n nm
Limits
Depends on the module used.
Resolution
0.1nm
Default
Depends on the module used.
CAL

This is a calibration o set that you can enter to compensate for external optical
circuitry. This value is automatically subtracted from the input signal.
Pmeasured (dBm) = Pinput (dBm) 0 CAL(dB )
Where,
Pmeasured is the adjusted value of the signal read,
Pinput is the input signal level, and
CAL is the calibration o set.
Display Format 6nnn.nnn dB
Limits
-200.000dB  nnn.nnn  +200.000dB
Resolution
.001dB
Default
0.000dB
When the calibration factor is not set to zero, the CAL parameter- indicator stays
on at half brightness.
T

This is the length of time over which a signal is averaged. Longer averaging
times increase the accuracy and improve the noise rejection of the
measurement. Longer averaging times also decrease sensitivity and increase the
length of time between updates of the results on the display.
For averaging times of 1 second or less, a new measurement is shown on the
display at the end of each averaging time. This is drawn in Figure 2-1. A new
measurement is shown on the display at each x.

Local Control - Measure Mode 2-3

2

2
Figure 2-1. Measurements with TAverage  1 second
For averaging times of more than 1 second, the x value is given by the formula




1 0 Tsample
Tsample
xnew = xold
+ Sample
Tavg

Tavg

Where
xnew
is the new, displayed result,
xold
is the previously displayed result,
Sample is the value read by the hardware,
Tavg
is the averaging time (as set by the user), and
Tsample is the time taken, by the hardware, to make a reading.
If the measurement conditions are changed (for example, by a range change in
autoranging) xold is reset, and the averaging starts again. This is why the display
update seems faster in autoranging.
Display Format nnn ms, s, min
Values
20, 50, 100, 200, 500ms, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 30s, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 20,
30, 60min
Default
200ms

Figure 2-2. Editing the Averaging Time Parameter
2-4 Local Control - Measure Mode

REF

dB results are shown relative to a reference-level. This parameter sets the
reference-level. You can choose the units for the reference using 4dBm W5.
Setting, or changing, the reference only a ects results that are displayed in dB.
Pdisplay (dB ) = Pmeasured 0 REF
Where,
Pdisplay is the displayed, relative power,
Pmeasured is the absolute power-level (see \CAL"), and
REF is the reference.

Logarithmic Units
Display Format 6nnn.nnn dBm
Limits
-200.000dBm  nnn.nnn  +200.000dBm
Resolution
Default

0.001dBm
0.000dBm

Display Format
Limits
Resolution
Default

5 digits pW, nW, W, mW.
0.001pW  n  9999.9mW
see Table 2-1
1000.0W

Linear Units

Local Control - Measure Mode 2-5

2

Table 2-1.
Range Upper Limit Resolution
Linear Power @T100ms

2

+30dBm
+20dBm
+10dBm
0dBm
-10dBm
-20dBm
-30dBm
-40dBm
-50dBm
-60dBm
-70dBm
-80dBm

1999.9mW
199.99mW
19.999mW
1999.9W
199.99W
19.999W
1999.9nW
199.99nW
19.999nW
1999.9pW
199.99pW
19.999pW

100W
10W
1W
100nW
10nW
1nW
100pW
10pW
1pW
0.1pW
0.01pW
0.001pW

ATT

The amount of power that is output from a source can be controlled. This
parameter sets the attenuation of an output.
Poutput = Psource 0 AT T (dB )
Where,
Poutput is the power-level at the output of the module,
Psource is the power-level at the output of the source, and
ATT is the attenuation parameter.
Display Format
Limits
Resolution
Default

6n.n dB
0.0dB  n.n  6.0dB
0.1dB
0.0dB

2-6 Local Control - Measure Mode

AUX

The output amplitude of a source can be modulated by a square wave. This
parameter sets the frequency of the modulation. The modulation can be one of
CW (continuous wave, that is no modulation), 270Hz, 1kHz, or 2kHz.
Values
CW, 270Hz, 1, 2kHz
Default
CW

The Disp!Ref Key

Pressing this key takes the input power-level and stores it as the reference.
Setting, or changing, the reference in this way only a ects results displayed in
dB.
If the display is in dBm or Watts, the measured power-level is stored as the
reference, that is
REF = Pmeasured
Where,
REF is the reference, and
Pmeasured is the absolute power-level (see \CAL").
If the display is in dB, this value is converted to dBm or Watts before being
stored as a reference, that is
REFnew = Pdisplay (dB ) + REFold
Where,
REFnew is the reference after the key press,
Pdisplay is the displayed, relative power, and
REFold is the reference before the key press.

Local Control - Measure Mode 2-7

2

2

The dB Key

This key switches the display to show results in dB. Results in dB are always
given with respect to another power-level. This can be a stored reference, or it
can be a second power-level.

Using 4dB5 with a Two Sensor Instrument

For an instrument with two sensors, the dB result can be with respect to the
reference stored for the channel, or it can be with respect to the power-level of
the other channel.
If the result is in dB with respect to the power-level of the other channel,
4dB5 changes the result to dB with respect to the stored reference. The
reference-indicator shows A/REF or B/REF. To see the reference , use 4Param5. To
set the reference you use 4Param5 or 4Disp!Ref5.
Pdisplay (dB ) = Pmeasured 0 REF

Where,
Pdisplay is the displayed, relative power,
Pmeasured is the absolute power-level (see \CAL"), and
REF is the reference.
If the result is in dB with respect to the reference, 4dB5 changes the result to dB
with respect to the power-level in the other channel. The reference-indicator
shows A/B or B/A. When the result is with respect to the power-level in the
other channel, the stored reference is also used in the calculation of the
displayed result.
Pdisplay (dB ) = Pmeasured1st Chan 0 Pmeasured2nd Chan 0 REF
Where,
Pdisplay is the displayed, relative power,
Pmeasured is the absolute power-level (see \CAL"), and
REF is the reference.
If the result is in dBm or Watts, 4dB5 changes the result to dB.

2-8 Local Control - Measure Mode

Using 4dB5 with a One Sensor Instrument

changes the display to show the result as a relative value with respect to
the stored reference. The reference-indicator shows A/REF or B/REF. To see the
reference, use 4Param5. To set the reference, use 4Param5 or 4Disp!Ref5.
4dB5

Pdisplay (dB ) = Pmeasured 0 REF

Where,
Pdisplay is the displayed, relative power,
Pmeasured is the absolute power-level (see \CAL"), and
REF is the reference.

The dBm/W Key

This key changes the display to show results in dBm or in Watts.
If the results are in dB, 4dBm W5 changes the display to showing the result as
dBm or Watts.
If the results are in dBm, 4dBm W5 changes the display to showing the results in
Watts.
If the results are in Watts, 4dBm W5 changes the display to showing the result in
dBm.

The Zero Key

The 4Zero5 works with sensor modules. The function of 4Zero5 is to remove any
electrical o set in the sensor circuitry.
The instrument measures by converting optical power to electrical power, and
then measuring the electrical power. An electrical o set is power that is always
present, even if there is no light at the input. If this o set is not removed, it
will a ect the results.
4Zero5 measures the electrical power when there is no light at the input. The
instrument uses this value to remove the o set from all further incoming
signals.
Local Control - Measure Mode 2-9

2

2

Note

The environmental conditions and the temperature of the
instrument a ect the electrical o set. For the best results you
must:
Allow the instrument time to acclimatize (c.24 hours).
Allow the instrument time to warm up (c.20 minutes).
Make sure that the optical input is not receiving any light. If
you are using multi-mode cable you must disconnect the cable
and cover the input to the sensor to perform a zero.
It is a good practice to zero the instrument before making any
important measurements.

The zero operation is performed just for the selected channel. The instrument
automatically repeats the zero operation for each measurement range.

Figure 2-3. The Display while Channel A is Being Zeroed
If there is light at the sensor input during a zero operation, the instrument
shows the message ZERO ERR. If you cannot remove the light, but you still want
to use the instrument, you can abort the zero operation by pressing any key.

2-10 Local Control - Measure Mode

The N Dig Key

2

This key selects the number of digits shown after the decimal point in the
result. When you use 4N Dig5 rst, it reduces the number of digits shown. After
the number of digits has been reduced to 1, 4N Dig5 increases the number of
digits shown. The maximum number of digits after the decimal point is 3.

The Range Keys

The range keys select the range of the units for the result. The table below
gives the possible ranges for results. The available ranges depend on the module
used.

Local Control - Measure Mode 2-11

2

Table 2-2. Power Ranges
Range Upper Linear
Power Limit
+30dBm
+20dBm
+10dBm
0dBm
-10dBm
-20dBm
-30dBm
-40dBm
-50dBm
-60dBm
-70dBm
-80dBm
-90dBm
-100dBm
-110dBm

1999.9mW
199.99mW
19.999mW
1999.9W
199.99W
19.999W
1999.9nW
199.99nW
19.999nW
1999.9pW
199.99pW
19.999pW
1.999pW
0.199pW
0.019pW

The range the instrument is using shows on the display while you press a range
keys. But, note that pressing a Range key alters the range used. Pressing 4Auto5
stops or starts the automatic ranging. Pressing 4Up5 or 4Down5 selects the next
range before showing it.
The bar graph below the result shows the result graphically. The left end of the
bar is 0% of the selected range, the right end of the bar is 100% of the selected
range.

2-12 Local Control - Measure Mode

The Auto Key

enables or disables automatic ranging for the result. Automatic ranging
ensures that the result has a displayed value between 9% and 100% of full
scale. While you have automatic ranging enabled, the operation-indicator shows
AUTO in the middle of the display. The default state is for automatic ranging to
be enabled.
4Auto5

The Up Key

This key selects the next higher range. If automatic ranging was in operation,
this key disables it.
Example
If the instrument is currently in the range 2.000 to 19.999W,
pressing 4Up5 takes it to the 20.00 to 199.99W range.

The Down Key

This key selects the next lower range. If automatic ranging was in operation,
this key disables it.
Example
If the instrument is currently in the -20dBm range, pressing
4Down5 takes it to the -30dBm range.

The Analog Output

The analog output is the BNC connector on the front of the sensor module. It
outputs a voltage directly proportional to the strength of the optical signal at
the optical input, in the current range.
The analog signal is always in the range 0 to 2V, 2V corresponding to a full
power input signal in the current range, 0V corresponding to no input signal.
If the range changes, for example, during autoranging, the level to which 2V
corresponds changes. Therefore it is recommended, if you want to use the
analog output, disable autoranging and select the best range for the application
with 4Up5 or 4Down5.
Possible applications for the analog output, would be to close the feedback
loop controlling the current supplied to a laser; or to monitor optical power on
an oscilloscope (the analog signal reacts instantaneously to the input signal,
whereas the power shown on the display is subject to averaging).

Local Control - Measure Mode 2-13

2

2

The Modify Keys

You use these keys to edit parameters. For the purposes of editing, there are
two types of parameter. One type is the parameter that can have one of several,
separate values, these are discrete valued parameters. The second type is the
parameter that can have any value between certain limits, these are continuous
valued parameters.

Editing Discrete Valued Parameters

When selecting one of several discrete values, the 4*5 selects the next highest
value and the 4+5 selects the next lowest value.
Example
The averaging time can have only particular values. If you are
editing this parameter and it is currently 200ms, pressing 4*5
changes the value to 500ms. If you are editing this parameter
and it is currently 200ms, pressing 4+5 changes the value to
100ms.
4)5 and 4(5 have no e ect in the editing of discrete valued parameters.

Editing Continuous Valued Parameters

Where a value is being set from between certain limits, you can edit each
character individually.
The 4(5 changes the editable character to the next one on the left. The 4)5
changes the editable character to the next one on the right. The editable
characters include each digit of numeric parameters, the decimal point (see
below), and characters in messages. When a character is selected for editing it
blinks.
Pressing 4+5 decrements the editable character. The 4*5 increments the editable
character.
Editing Units

To edit the magnitude of Watt values, select the decimal point as the editable
character. Use the 4+5 to move the decimal point to the left, use 4*5 to move the
decimal point to the right.
When the decimal point reaches its rightmost or leftmost position, pressing the
key again changes the multiplier of the units.
2-14 Local Control - Measure Mode

Example

If you are editing a reference, and the value is 234.5W, with
the eld of edit at the decimal point, pressing 4+5 changes the
value to 2.345nW.
Similarly, if you are editing a reference, and the value is
2.345W, with the eld of edit at the decimal point, pressing 4*5
changes the value to 234.5mW.

Local Control - Measure Mode 2-15

2

3
Menu Mode

3

In menu mode the instrument o ers several advanced test applications. When
the instrument is in this mode, the mode-indicator shows MENU. In this mode the
blue legends, above the keys, show the commands available to the user.

The Chan Key

4Chan5 selects the channel. This can be A or B. The channel- indicator, at the top
of the display, shows the selected channel.

Note

Functions in the Menu mode apply only to the selected channel.

When the instrument is under remote control, this key acts as 4Local5. That is, it
returns the instrument to local control (unless Local Lockout is active).

The Mode Key

changes the operating mode. If you press this key in menu mode, it
changes the instrument into measure mode (the previous chapter gives a
description of measure mode).
4Mode5

Note

The commands described in this chapter can only be used when
the instrument is in Menu mode.

Local Control - Menu Mode 3-1

The System Key

changes the instrument to system mode (the next chapter gives a
description of system mode).
4System5

3

The Modify Keys

The section \The Modify Keys" in Chapter 2, gives a description of how to use
the Modify keys.

The Loss Key

starts the loss application. You need both a source and a sensor module to
run this application.
A loss measurement tells you how much of your optical signal you lose by
passing it through a device. You calculate loss by the following formula:
4Loss5

Loss = 10log(

Pout
)dB
Pin

To measure loss you need both quantities, Pin and Pout . The application
measures Pin when you start it running. Once you have taken a reference, the
instrument expresses all the following results relative to this. These results are
loss results.

Preparation

You need both a source and a sensor module for the Loss application.
Before you start the Loss application, make sure that you have set all the
measurement-parameters that you use. It is most important to make sure that
you have set T for the sensor and  for the source. If you are already in Menu
mode, you have to return to Measure mode to set these parameters.

3-2 Local Control - Menu Mode

Running the Loss Application

After pressing 4Loss5, the instrument checks to see if both a source and sensor
module are present. If one or both are missing the character eld shows the
message CONFIG ?. The instrument does not enter the loss application.
If both modules are present:
The sensor wavelength is automatically set to the wavelength of the source.
(When you stop the application running, the parameters for the sensor are
automatically reset to the values in use before you started the application.)
The operation-indicator shows APPL, this stays lit while the instrument is in
the loss application.
The instrument shows LOSS in the character eld.
The instrument reads the reference level when you start the application
running. To read the input signal and use it as the reference, do the following:
1. Make sure that the device under test is not in the system.
2. Make sure that the source is not active. The source is active whenever the
green LED on its front panel lights.
3. Connect the source to the input of the system without the device under test.
4. Connect the output of the system to the sensor.

Figure 3-1. Measuring the Reference for the Loss Application
5. Press 4Exec5.
The instrument takes the reference and then runs the application. While the
application is running, the RUN operation-indicator lights.
Local Control - Menu Mode 3-3

3

3

Warning

Do not look into the end of an optical cable attached to a
laser output when the device is operational.

Note

Do not disconnect the ber from the source when making a loss
measurement. A small change in the coupling at the source can
introduce large errors into your measurement.

Once you have taken the reference, you can place the device under test into the
system.

Figure 3-2. Measuring the Loss of a Device Under Test (DUT)
Do not stop and restart the application as you insert and change devices
under test. Every time you start the application, the instrument takes a
new reference. You can switch the source o and on without disturbing the
reference value. Do this to avoid exposure to laser radiation when you are
changing the device under test.
While the application is running, the result eld shows the loss, in dB, and the
character eld shows the reference, in dBm. 1 indicates the result eld and 2
indicates the character eld in Figure 3-3. If you are using both wavelengths
of a dual wavelength source, the loss and reference for both wavelengths are
displayed. The loss and reference for the lower wavelength is shown on the
left. The loss and reference for the higher wavelength is shown on the right.

3-4 Local Control - Menu Mode

3

Figure 3-3. The Loss Result
4Exec5

stops the application running.

The Record Key

starts the record applications. Record applications allow you to take a
number of samples in succession. There are three types of record application.
Stability takes samples at evenly spaced intervals over a speci ed period.
Logging takes a speci ed number of samples one immediately after the other.
That is, as soon as the rst sample has ended, the second starts.
Manual Logging takes a sample each time the user presses the 4Exec5 key.
In addition, there are plot and print applications that allow you to make a
graphics plot, or a printout of the samples of your record application.
The nal application on the Record key is the MinMax application, which
displays minimum measured value and the di erence between this minimum
and the maximum measured value, for a changing power level.
4Record5

Local Control - Menu Mode 3-5

Preparation

You need a sensor module to perform any of the record applications. For the
stability, or either of the logging applications, the only hardware setup you need
is to have the device under test connected to the sensor.

3

Figure 3-4. Setup for a Record Application
To make a plot of the samples you need a HPGL plotter. To get a printout of
the samples you need a Thinkjet printer. If you are using a plotter or a printer,
it must be attached as the only device to the HP-IB connector on the back of
the instrument. The device address of the plotter must be set to 5. The device
address of the printer must be set to 1. To output to a printer or plotter, the
instrument HPIB State must be set to Talk Only (for instructions on how to do
this see \MODE" in Chapter 4).
With Firmware revisions 1.7 and greater, to output to a printer or plotter, the
instrument HPIB State must be set to Talk Listen (the default condition). For
information on setting the HPIB Status, see \MODE" in Chapter 4.

Note

To nd the rmware revision, switch o the instrument, and
then hold any key while the instrument is powering up. The
rmware revision is shown at the bottom right of the display.
Switch o the instrument and power it up again for normal
operation.

Before you start a record application, make sure that you have set all the
measurement-parameters that you use. It is most important to make sure that
3-6 Local Control - Menu Mode

you have set T and  for the sensor. If you are already in Menu mode, you have
to return to Measure mode to set these parameters.
After pressing 4Record5, you choose an application using 4Record5, 4Next5 or 4Prev5.
4Record5 and 4Next5 choose the next of the record applications. 4Prev5 chooses the
previous of the record applications. While you are in the record applications the
APPL operation-indicator lights. The application is displayed in the character
eld of the selected channel.

The Stability Application

In the Stability application the instrument makes a number of evenly spaced
samples over a period speci ed by the user. The application rst takes
consecutive samples of the power from the device under test (that is, the next
sample begins as soon as the previous one has nished). Some of this data is
then discarded so that the samples are evenly spaced over the whole of the
speci ed period. The maximum number of samples is 500.
Example
Tavg is set to 1s (Tavg is T set in Measure mode).
The user sets the total time for the stability application to 8
minutes and 22 seconds. This is a total time of 502 seconds.
The instrument takes 502 samples, but discards every second
sample so that at the end, there are 251 evenly spaced samples.
When you select the Stability application the character eld shows STABILTY.

Figure 3-5. Selecting an Application : Stability
Local Control - Menu Mode 3-7

3

3

This application has two parameters. T_TOTAL sets the total time for Stability
application. AUTODUMP enables or disables the automatic plotting or printing
of the samples when the application nishes. All the other parameters
(Wavelength, Tavg , etc.) use the values given to them in measure mode.
Press 4Edit5 to look at, or edit the parameters. After pressing 4Edit5, you can select
parameters using 4Next5 and 4Prev5. While you are editing a parameter, the EDIT
operation-indicator lights.

T TOTAL

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
T_TOTAL. The right side character eld shows the value for the total time.
You edit the time using the Modify keys. The lower limit for the time is 1
second. The higher limit for the total time is 99 hours, 59 minutes and 59
seconds. The displayed value is always the setting for the total time. Due to
the way the measurements are taken, you may nd that the application runs
for a little longer than T_TOTAL. The di erence of the actual total time from
T_TOTAL depends on a number of factors including the system con guration.
The worst case timing di erence is 30s/h.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameter.

AUTODUMP

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
AUTODUMP. The right side character eld shows whether the automatic dump
has been enabled. The dump can be a plot of the samples or a printout of the
samples. If the automatic dump is enabled the dump is made after the Stability
application has taken the last sample.

Note

Other applications also use the same AUTODUMP parameter.
Changing this parameter in the Logging application a ects the
Stability application.
The Plot application sets the parameters for an automatic
plot. The Print application sets the parameters for an
automatic print. These applications are described later in this
chapter.
You should not enable automatic dumping to a printer or
plotter if there is a logging or stability application running in
the other channel. The automatic dump is given priority, and

3-8 Local Control - Menu Mode

the application in the other channel will be stopped for the
duration of the print or plot.
In the case of a logging application, the linearity of the timing
information is a ected. In the case of a stability application,
no new data is recorded while the dump is being made.
You edit the dump enable using the Modify keys. It can have the value OFF,
to disable both the automatic plot and the automatic print, PLOTTER to enable
the plot, or PRINTER, to enable the print. The displayed value is always the
setting for the dump.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameter.

Running the Stability Application
To run the application, press 4Exec5. You cannot run the application if
you are editing parameters. While the application is running, the RUN
operation-indicator lights.
While the application is running, the result eld shows the sample, and the
character eld shows the time remaining until the application nishes. After all
the samples have been taken, the RUN operation-indicator switches o .
4Pause5 suspends the running of the application. You can restart it by pressing
4Pause5 a second time. When you have pressed pause, you can look at the
parameters set for the application in the Measure mode. You select parameters
with 4Next5 and 4Prev5.
4Exec5 stops the application running.

Local Control - Menu Mode 3-9

3

The Logging Application

3

In the Logging application the instrument makes a number of consecutive
samples. The user speci es the number of samples. Consecutive samples are
samples where one begins as soon as the previous one has nished.
When you select the Logging application the character eld shows LOGGING.
This application has several parameters. SAMPLES sets the number of samples
that are to be taken. AUTODUMP enables or disables the automatic plotting or
printing of the samples when the application nishes. START determines the
conditions that have to be met before the application starts taking samples.
THRESHLD sets the threshold power that must be crossed before the application
starts taking samples. All the other parameters (Wavelength, Tavg , etc.) use the
values given to them in measure mode.
Press 4Edit5 to look at, or edit the parameters. After pressing 4Edit5, you can select
parameters using 4Next5 and 4Prev5. While you are editing a parameter, the EDIT
operation-indicator lights.
The total time for the logging application consists of the averaging time and the
time to process the sample. That is, a sample is only taken after the previous
sample has been taken and processed.
The processing time depends on a number of factors including the system
con guration. If any applications or measurements are running in the other
channel, the processing time between samples may vary.
On printer or plotter outputs, the total time given for the logging application
includes both the averaging and the processing time.

SAMPLES

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
SAMPLES. The right side character eld shows the number of samples to be
taken.

3-10 Local Control - Menu Mode

3

Figure 3-6. Editing an Application Parameter : Samples
You edit the number of samples using the Modify keys. The lower limit is 2.
The higher limit is 500. The displayed value is always the setting for the
number of samples.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.

AUTODUMP

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
AUTODUMP. The right side character eld shows whether the automatic dump
has been enabled. The dump can be a graphic plot of the samples or a printout
of the samples. If the automatic dump is enabled the dump is made after the
Stability application has taken the last sample.

Note

Other applications also use the AUTODUMP parameter. Changing
this parameter in the Logging application a ects the Stability
application.
The Plot application sets the parameters for an automatic
plot. The Print application sets parameters for an automatic
print. These applications are described later in this chapter.
You should not enable automatic dumping to a printer or
plotter if there is a logging or stability application running in
the other channel. The automatic dump is given priority, and
the application in the other channel will be stopped for the
duration of the print or plot.
Local Control - Menu Mode 3-11

In the case of a logging application, the linearity of the timing
information is a ected. In the case of a stability application,
no new data is recorded while the dump is being made.

3

You edit the dump enable using the Modify keys. It can have the values OFF,
to disable both the automatic plot and the automatic print, PLOTTER to enable
the plot, or PRINTER, to enable the print. The displayed value is always the
setting for the dump.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameter.

START

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
START. The right side character eld shows which of the start conditions has
been enabled. The application can be started immediately when you press 4Exec5,
or it can be started when the input power-level is above or below a certain
threshold.
You edit the start condition using the Modify keys. It can have the values
IMMEDIAT, to start the application when you press 4Exec5, ABOVE to start the
application when the input power-level is above a certain threshold, or
BELOW, to start the application when the input power-level is below a certain
threshold. The displayed value is always the setting for the start condition.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameter.

THRESHLD

You can only select this parameter when START is set to ABOVE or BELOW. When
you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
THRESHLD. The right side character eld shows the threshold that has to be
crossed before the application starts taking samples.
You edit the threshold using the Modify keys. The lower limit is -400.00dBm.
The higher limit is 400.00dBm. The displayed value is always the setting for
the threshold.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.
3-12 Local Control - Menu Mode

Running the Logging Application

To run the application, press 4Exec5. You cannot run the application if
you are editing parameters. While the application is running, the RUN
operation-indicator lights.
While the application is running, the result eld shows the sample, and the
character eld shows the number of samples that have been taken. After all the
samples have been taken, the RUN operation- indicator switches o .
4Pause5 suspends the running of the application. You can restart it by pressing
4Pause5 a second time. When you have pressed pause, you can look at the
parameters set for the application in the Measure mode. You select parameters
with 4Next5 and 4Prev5.
4Exec5 stops the application running.

The Manual Logging Application

In the Manual Logging application the instrument takes a sample every time the
user presses 4Exec5.
When you select the Logging application the character eld shows MAN LOGG.
Press 4Edit5 to look at the existing samples, or to take a sample again. After
pressing 4Edit5 you can select a sample using the Modify keys. While you are
editing samples, the EDIT operation- indicator lights. To take a sample again,
press 4Exec5, the input power-level replaces the power-level logged for the
chosen sample.
Press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing.

Running the Manual Logging Application

While the application is running, the result eld shows the input power-level,
and the character eld shows the number of samples taken.
To take a sample, press 4Exec5. When you press 4Exec5 the result is stored as the
next sample.
Example
The user is not currently editing samples. The character eld
shows #61, that is, 61 samples have been taken. On pressing
Local Control - Menu Mode 3-13

3

, the input power-level is read and stored as sample
number 62. #62 is shown in the character eld.
While a sample is being taken, the RUN operation-indicator lights.
4Exec5

3

The Plot Application

In the Plot application the instrument takes the samples from a Stability or
Logging application and generates a plot of the samples. You can only plot
the samples from the most recent Stability or Logging or Manual Logging
application.
To make a plot of the samples you need a HPGL plotter. The plotter must
be attached as the only device to the HP-IB connector on the back of the
instrument. The device address of the plotter must be set to 5. To output to a
plotter the instrument HPIB State must be set to Talk Only (for instructions on
how to do this see \MODE" in Chapter 4).
With Firmware revisions 1.7 and greater, to output to a printer or plotter, the
instrument HPIB State must be set to Talk Listen (the default condition). For
information on setting the HPIB Status, see \MODE" in Chapter 4.

Note

To nd the rmware revision, switch o the instrument, and
then hold any key while the instrument is powering up. The
rmware revision is shown at the bottom right of the display.
Switch o the instrument and power it up again for normal
operation.

When you select the Plot application the character eld shows PLOT. This
application has several parameters. AUTOSCAL enables or disables automatic
scaling of the plot. Y_MIN sets the minimum value on the y-axis of the plot.
Y_MAX sets the maximum value on the y-axis of the plot. COMMENT is an eight
character message printed on the plot for identi cation.
Press 4Edit5 to look at, or edit the parameters. After pressing 4Edit5, you can select
parameters using 4Next5 and 4Prev5. While you are editing a parameter, the EDIT
operation-indicator lights.

3-14 Local Control - Menu Mode

AUTOSCAL

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
AUTOSCAL. The right side character eld shows whether automatic scaling has
been enabled. If automatic scaling is enabled the instrument decides the best
limits for the y-axis by examining the samples.
You edit the automatic scaling enable using the Modify keys. It can have
the value OFF, to disable both automatic scaling, or ON, to enable automatic
scaling. The displayed value is always the setting for the scaling.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.
The maximum and minimum values you choose for the graph, when autoscaling
is o , are subject to rounding. The nal scaling is calculated to give eleven
divisions of the y-axis with standard spacings (that is, spacings that are multiples
of 1, 2 or 5).

Y MIN

You can only select this parameter when AUTOSCAL is set to OFF. When you
select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message Y_MIN. The
right side character eld shows the minimum value for the y-axis of the plot.
You edit the y-axis minimum value using the Modify keys. The lower limit is
-800.00dBm. The higher limit is 800.00dBm. The displayed value is always
the setting for the minimum.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.

Y MAX

You can only select this parameter when AUTOSCAL is set to OFF. When you
select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message Y_MAX. The
right side character eld shows the maximum value for the y-axis of the plot.
You edit the y-axis maximum value using the Modify keys. The lower limit is
-800.00dBm. The higher limit is 800.00dBm. The displayed value is always
the setting for the maximum.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.
Local Control - Menu Mode 3-15

3

COMMENT

When you select this parameter the left side character eld shows the message
COMMENT. The right side character eld shows the comment string. The comment
string is included so that you can identify the plot.

3

Note

Other applications in the same channel share the COMMENT
parameter. Changing this parameter in the Plot application
a ects the Print application.

You edit the comment using the Modify keys. There are eight characters in
the comment and each of these can be a number (0 to 9), a math symbol (-,
+), a space, a letter (A to Z), or punctuation symbols (!, ?, ., ,, :, ;, &, |, @,
#, $, %, *, [, ], , or !). The displayed characters are always the setting for
the comment.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.

Running the Plot Application

To run the application, press 4Exec5. You cannot run the application if
you are editing parameters. While the application is running, the RUN
operation-indicator lights.
If you try to run the plot without samples or with invalid samples, the message
NO DATA, or DATA ?, shows in the character eld. The application does not run.
After the plot has nished, the RUN operation-indicator switches o .
4Exec5 stops the application running. The message ABORTED shows in the
character eld.

Reading the Plot

Figure 3-7 shows a sample plot. The areas on this gure are:
The HP logo and the instrument number.
The type of record application that produce the samples. This is one of
STABILITY, LOGGING, or MAN LOGG.
The comment. The message set up in the Plot application is included here on
the plot.
3-16 Local Control - Menu Mode

The rst column of data contains the parameters set in Measure mode. These
are T avg, the averaging time, Cal Fact the calibration factor, Wvl, the
wavelength, and Reference, the reference power-level. The reference is not
included when the samples were taken as absolute values.
The second column of data contains the parameters set in Menu mode for
the application. These are T total, the period for which the application
was taking samples, and Samples, the number of samples taken. Also in this
column is the data and time at which the record application was run.
The total time for the logging application consists of the averaging time
and the time to process the sample. That is, a sample is only taken after
the previous sample has been taken and processed. On the plot, the total
time given for the logging application includes both the averaging and the
processing time.

Local Control - Menu Mode 3-17

3

3

Figure 3-7. Stability Plot
The third column of data contains statistics based on the samples taken.
These are Max, the maximum power-level sampled, Min the minimum
power-level sampled, Diff, the di erence between the minimum and
maximum power-levels sampled, and Avg, the mean average of the samples.

Note

If the samples are taken in dB or dBm, Avg is the mean average
of these logarithmic values. If the samples are taken in Watts,
Avg is the mean average of the linear values.

The quantity on the y-axis of the plot is always power. The units can be dBm,
dB, or Watts.
3-18 Local Control - Menu Mode

The quantity on the x-axis of the plot is time for the plot of samples from a
Stability or a Logging application, or the number of samples for the plot from
a Manual Logging application. The units of time can be seconds, minutes or
hours.
The plot is of the power as a function of time for the Stability or Logging
applications. The plot is of power as a function of the number of samples
taken for the Manual Logging application.
Horizontal dotted lines are drawn on the plot at the maximum, minimum and
average power-levels sampled. A vertical dotted line marks the nal sample.

The Print Application

In the Print application the instrument takes the samples from a Stability or
Logging application and generates a graphic printout of the samples. You can
only printout the samples from the most recent Stability or Logging or Manual
Logging application, in the selected channel.
To make a printout of the samples you need a Thinkjet printer. The printer
must be attached as the only device to the HP-IB connector on the back of the
instrument. The device address of the printer must be set to 1. To output to a
printer the instrument HPIB State must be set to Talk Only (for instructions on
how to do this see \MODE" in Chapter 4).
With Firmware revisions 1.7 and greater, to output to a printer or plotter, the
instrument HPIB State must be set to Talk Listen (the default condition). For
information on setting the HPIB Status, see \MODE" in Chapter 4.

Note

To nd the rmware revision, switch o the instrument, and
then hold any key while the instrument is powering up. The
rmware revision is shown at the bottom right of the display.
Switch o the instrument and power it up again for normal
operation.

When you select the Print application the character eld shows PRINT. This
application has several parameters. AUTOSCAL enables or disables automatic
scaling of the plot. Y_MIN sets the minimum value on the y-axis of the plot.
Y_MAX sets the maximum value on the y-axis of the plot. COMMENT is an eight
character message printed on the plot for identi cation.
Local Control - Menu Mode 3-19

3

Press 4Edit5 to look at, or edit the parameters. After pressing 4Edit5, you can select
parameters using 4Next5 and 4Prev5. While you are editing a parameter, the EDIT
operation- indicator lights.

3

AUTOSCAL

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
AUTOSCAL. The right side character eld shows whether automatic scaling has
been enabled. If automatic scaling is enabled the instrument decides the best
limits for the y-axis by examining the samples.

Note

Other applications in the same channel share the AUTOSCAL
parameter. Changing this parameter in the Print application
a ects the Plot application.

You edit the automatic scaling enable using the Modify keys. It can have
the value OFF, to disable both automatic scaling, or ON, to enable automatic
scaling. The displayed value is always the setting for the scaling.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.
The maximum and minimum values you choose for the graph, when autoscaling
is o , are subject to rounding. The nal scaling is calculated to give eleven
divisions of the y-axis with standard spacings (that is, spacings that are multiples
of 1, 2 or 5).

Y MIN

You can only select this parameter when AUTOSCAL is set to OFF. When you
select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message Y_MIN. The
right side character eld shows the minimum value for the y-axis of the plot.

Note

Other applications in the same channel share the Y_MIN
parameter. Changing this parameter in the Print application
a ects the Plot application.

You edit the y-axis minimum value using the Modify keys. The lower limit is
-800.00dBm. The higher limit is 800.00dBm. The displayed value is always
the setting for the minimum.
3-20 Local Control - Menu Mode

You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.

Y MAX

You can only select this parameter when AUTOSCAL is set to OFF. When you
select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message Y_MAX. The
right side character eld shows the maximum value for the y-axis of the plot.

Note

Other applications in the same channel share the Y_MAX
parameter. Changing this parameter in the Print application
a ects the Plot application.

You edit the y-axis maximum value using the Modify keys. The lower limit is
-800.00dBm. The higher limit is 800.00dBm. The displayed value is always
the setting for the maximum.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.

COMMENT

When you select this parameter the left side character eld shows the message
COMMENT. The right side character eld shows the comment string. The comment
string is included so that you can identify the plot.

Note

Other applications in the same channel share the COMMENT
parameter. Changing this parameter in the Print application
a ects the Plot application.

You edit the comment using the Modify keys. There are eight characters in
the comment and each of these can be a number (0 to 9), a math symbol (-,
+), a space, a letter (A to Z), or punctuation symbols (!, ?, ., ,, :, ;, &, |, @,
#, $, %, *, [, ], , or !). The displayed characters are always the setting for
the comment.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.

Local Control - Menu Mode 3-21

3

Running the Print Application

3

To run the application, press 4Exec5. You cannot run the application if
you are editing parameters. While the application is running, the RUN
operation-indicator lights.
If you try to run the print without samples or with invalid samples, the message
NO DATA, or DATA ?, shows in the character eld. The application does not run.
After the print has nished, the RUN operation-indicator switches o .
4Exec5 stops the application running. The message ABORTED shows in the
character eld.

Reading the Printout

The following gure shows a sample of the printout.

3-22 Local Control - Menu Mode

3

Figure 3-8. Logging Printout
The areas on the gure are:
The header contains the instrument number. Also in the printout header is
the data and time at which the record application was run.
The application parameters are given in three blocks. In the rst block is the
type of application that took the samples. This is one of STABILITY, LOGGING,
or MANUAL LOGGING.
Local Control - Menu Mode 3-23

3

Also in the rst block is the Measurement type, this describes the channel
used, and how the readings were made, for example, Ch. A (Absolute) when
absolute readings were made in channel A, or B / REF when relative readings
were made in channel B.
The last element in the rst block is the comment. The message set up in the
Plot application is here on the printout.
The second block of data contains the parameters set in Measure mode.
These are T avg, the averaging time, Cal Fact the calibration factor, Wvl, the
wavelength, and Reference, the reference power-level. The reference is not
included when the samples were taken as absolute values.
The third block of data contains the parameters set in Menu mode for the
application. These are T total, the period for which the application was
taking samples, and Samples, the number of samples taken.
The total time for the logging application consists of the averaging time and
the time to process the sample. That is, a sample is only taken after the
previous sample has been taken and processed. On the printout, the total
time given for the logging application includes both the averaging and the
processing time.
The nal block of data contains statistics based on the samples taken. These
are Max, the maximum power-level sampled, Min the minimum power-level
sampled, Diff, the di erence between the minimum and maximum
power-levels sampled, and Avg, the mean average of the samples.

Note

If the samples are taken in dB or dBm, Avg is the mean average
of these logarithmic values. If the samples are taken in Watts,
Avg is the mean average of the linear values.

The printer now outputs a graph with the same format as the plot (see
Figure 3-7). That is,
The quantity on the y-axis of the graph is power. The units can be dBm, dB,
or Watts.
The quantity on the x-axis of the graph is time for the graph of samples from
a Stability or a Logging application, or the number of samples for the graph
from a Manual Logging application. The units of time can be seconds, minutes
or hours.

3-24 Local Control - Menu Mode

The graph is of the power as a function of time for the Stability or Logging
applications. The graph is of power as a function of the number of samples
taken for the Manual Logging application.
Horizontal dotted lines are drawn on the graph at the maximum, minimum
and average power-levels sampled.

The MinMax Applications

MinMax is only supplied with software versions 2.1 and later.

Note

To nd the rmware revision, switch o the instrument, and
then hold any key while the instrument is powering up. The
rmware revision is shown at the bottom right of the display.
Switch o the instrument and power it up again for normal
operation.

The MinMax applications are intended principally for polarization dependent
measurements, but can be used for other types of measurement.
MinMax measures the incoming power, and displays the minimum value
measured (at the bottom of the display), and the di erence between this
minimum and the maximum value measured (at the top of the display).
There are three modes of operation.
Continuous mode, which compares each new measured value with the
maximum and minimum values so far, and replaces them as necessary.
This mode is useful for measuring the Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) of a
component. Run the application while sweeping the polarization of the source
applied to the component.
Window mode, which compares each new measured value with the maximum
and minimum values for the last N samples (N, the number of samples is set
by the user).
Refresh mode, which compares each new measured value with the maximum
and minimum values for the current N samples (N, the number of samples is
set by the user). The minimum and maximum are calculated and displayed for
one set of samples at a time, after the full set of samples have been measured.
Local Control - Menu Mode 3-25

3

The Window and Refresh modes are for use, for example, when you are
searching for or setting the position of minimum PDL.

Note
3

The length of the window, or the refresh period must be shorter
than the rate at which you are changing the polarization, in this
case.

Figure 3-9. The Window and Refresh Modes

3-26 Local Control - Menu Mode

MODE

This is the parameter which chooses the mode,
CONT selects the continuous mode,
WINDOW selects the Window mode, and
REFRESH selects the Refresh mode.

3

SAMPLES

This is the parameter which sets the length of the Window or Refresh mode.
It is possible to use up to 500 samples in the Window mode.
It is possible to use up to 10000 samples in the Refresh mode.
The length of the window or the refresh period is set by the number of samples,
and the averaging time. The averaging time is set in Measure mode.

Running the MinMax Application

To run the application, press 4Exec5. You cannot run the application if you are
editing parameters (press 4Edit5 again, to nish editing parameters). While the
application is running, the RUN operation-indicator lights.
While the application is running, the result eld shows the di erence between
minimum and maximum measurements, and the character eld shows the
minimum measurement.
4Pause5 suspends the running of the application. While the application is paused,
the power level is shown in the result eld. You can restart the MinMax
application by pressing 4Pause5 a second time.
4Exec5 stops the application running.

Local Control - Menu Mode 3-27

The More Key

gets you into the other applications. The full list of these applications
depends on the modules that you have installed. There are two that are
standard, these come with the mainframe. They are the show and the alignment
applications.
After pressing 4More5, you choose an application using 4Next5, 4More5 or 4Prev5. 4More5
acts in the same way as 4Next5. The application is displayed in the character eld
of the selected channel.
4More5

3

The Show Application

In the Show application you can look at the samples from a Stability or Logging
application. You can only look at the samples from the most recent Stability or
Logging or Manual Logging application.
When you select the Show application the character eld shows SHOW. This
application has no parameters that can be modi ed.
Press 4Edit5 to look at the stored values. While you are looking at the stored
values, the EDIT operation-indicator lights. To move from one value to another
you use 4Prev5 and 4Next5.

MAXIMUM

When MAXIMUM shows in the left side character eld, the value in the right side
character eld is the maximum power-level sampled.

MINIMUM

When MINIMUM shows in the left side character eld, the value in the right side
character eld is the minimum power-level sampled.

3-28 Local Control - Menu Mode

DIFF

When DIFF shows in the left side character eld, the value in the right
side character eld is the di erence between the minimum and maximum
power-levels sampled.

3

AVERAGE

When AVERAGE shows in the left side character eld, the value in the right side
character eld is the mean average of the samples.

Note

If the samples are taken in dB or dBm, Avg is the mean average
of these logarithmic values. If the samples are taken in Watts,
Avg is the mean average of the linear values.

#1

When # 1 shows in the left side character eld, the value in the right side
character eld is the rst of the samples taken. To examine the rest of the
samples, use the Modify keys. In this case the Modify keys operate on the value
in the left side character eld.

The Alignment Application

The Alignment application simpli es the alignment of two optical components to
get the best transfer of power from one to the other.

Preparation

You need a sensor module to perform the Alignment application. The only
hardware setup you need is to have the device under test connected to the
sensor.

Local Control - Menu Mode 3-29

3

Figure 3-10. Setup for an Alignment Application
Before you start the Alignment application, make sure that you have set all the
measurement-parameters that you use. It is most important to make sure that
you have set T and  for the sensor. If you are already in Menu mode, you have
to return to Measure mode to set these parameters.
When you select the Alignment application the character eld shows ALIGNMNT.
This application has several parameters. TYPE sets whether the instrument
automatically records the maximum power-level, or the user sets the
maximum power-level. DELTA sets the range of power shown by the graphic
bar. MAXPOWER sets the maximum power- level. All the other parameters
(Wavelength, Tavg , etc.) use the values given to them in measure mode.
Press 4Edit5 to look at, or edit the parameters. After pressing 4Edit5, you can select
parameters using 4Next5 and 4Prev5. While you are editing a parameter, the EDIT
operation-indicator lights.

TYPE

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
TYPE. The right side character eld shows whether the automatic recording of
the maximum power-level has been enabled.
You edit the mode using the Modify keys. It can have the values AUTO, to
enable the automatic recording of the maximum power- level, or MANUAL,
where the user sets the maximum power-level. The displayed value is always
the setting for the mode.

3-30 Local Control - Menu Mode

You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.

DELTA

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
DELTA. The right side character eld shows the value for the delta.
You edit the delta using the Modify keys. The lower limit is 0.01dB. The
higher limit is 13.00dB. The displayed value is always the setting for the delta.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.

MAXPOWER

You can only select this parameter when TYPE is set to MANUAL. When you select
this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message MAXPOWER. The
right side character eld shows the setting for the maximum power.
You edit the maximum power using the Modify keys. The lower limit is
-400.00dBm. The higher limit is 400.00dBm. The displayed value is always
the setting for the maximum.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.

Running the Alignment Application
To run the application, press 4Exec5. You cannot run the application if
you are editing parameters. While the application is running, the RUN
operation-indicator lights.
While the application is running, the left side result eld shows the maximum
power-level. If TYPE is set to AUTO, the maximum power-level is the maximum
input power-level read since the application started. If TYPE is set to MANUAL,
the maximum power-level is set by MAXPOWER. The right side result eld shows
the input power-level, in dB, relative to the maximum power-level.

Local Control - Menu Mode 3-31

3

3

Figure 3-11. The Display during the Alignment Application
The character eld shows the input power-level graphically. The right end
of the character eld always represents the maximum power-level. The left
end of the character eld represents Pmax 0 1P, where Pmax is the maximum
power-level, and 1P is determined by DELTA. Pressing 4*5 and 4+5 changes 1P.
When the the graph is seven dots high, 1P is equal to DELTA. If you press 4*5,
1P is now equal to half the value of DELTA and the graph is shown ve dots
high. If you press 4*5 a second time, 1P is equal to a quarter the value of DELTA
and the graph is shown three dots high.
Example
DELTA is set to 1.00dB. MAXPOWER is set to 1.00dBm.
The right end of the graph represents 1.00dBm. At the start of
the application The left end of the graph represents 0.00dBm.
4*5 is pressed twice.
The left end of the graph represents 0.75dBm. The graph is
three dots high.
4+5 is pressed once.
The left end of the graph represents 0.50dBm. The graph is ve
dots high.
If only the last column of dots on the left is lit, the power-level is outside the
limits set by Pmax 0 1P and Pmax
4Pause5 enables and disables the tone. The frequency of the tone increases with
input power-level. The lowest frequency corresponds to the left side of the
power graph in the character eld. The highest frequency corresponds to the
right side of the power graph in the character eld. If the power-level is outside
the limits set by Pmax 0 1P and Pmax , no tone sounds.
3-32 Local Control - Menu Mode

4Exec5

stops the application running.

3

Local Control - Menu Mode 3-33

4
System Mode
System mode is where you set the con gurations that a ect the instrument as a
whole. When you activate system mode, the mode- indicator shows MENU SYS at
the top of the display.

The Mode Key

selects the operating mode. Pressing this key when in the system mode
transfers operation to Measure mode.
4Mode5

Note

The commands described in this chapter can only be used when
the instrument is in System mode.

The Modify Keys

See \The Modify Keys" in Chapter 2 for details on how to use the modify keys.

Local Control - System Mode 4-1

4

The System Key

selects the parameter-set for modi cation. You choose a parameter-set
using 4Next5, 4System5 or 4Prev5. 4System5 acts in the same way as 4Next5. The current
application is displayed in the character eld of the current channel.
4System5

Note

4

The con guration information is held in memory until the next
time you speci cally modify it. It is not a ected by the power
to the instrument being switched o .

RECALL

The recall function sets a channel con guration according to data that has been
stored in memory. When you select the recall function, the left side character
eld shows the message RECALL.

Figure 4-1. Making a Selection in System Mode : the Recall Function
There are three parameters for this function. The module type that the
con guration was saved for, the location where the con guration was saved,
and the channel to set with the con guration.
Press 4Edit5 to look at or edit the parameters. All of the parameters are displayed
at the same time in the right side character eld. You can select between the
location and the channel using 4(5 and 4)5. You cannot edit the module type.
While you are editing parameters, the mode-indicator shows MENU SYS EDIT.
Press 4EXEC5 to make a recall of the selected data.
4-2 Local Control - System Mode

The Module Type

The module type is indicated by the last two numeric digits of the product
number. Not all locations have a module type. That is, the standard setting,
and locations that have not been used to store con guration data do not have a
module type parameter. You must have the correct module type in the selected
channel to make a recall. If you do not, the message MISMATCH will be shown
when you try to make a recall.
The Location

The location where the con guration data is stored is a number between 0 and
9. This number is displayed to the left of the arrow.
You edit the location using the Modify keys. The location used for the recall is
the displayed value.
Location 0 always contains the standard setting. The standard setting is:

Parameter

Setting

Sensor


CAL
T
REF
Auto Ranging
Units
Display

Module dependent.
0.000dB.
200ms (500ms for Head Interface Module).
1000.0W.
Enabled.
Watts
Full Resolution

Source


ATT
AUX
Output

Module dependent, lower wavelength for dual wavelength
source.
0.0dB.
CW.
Disabled.

The Channel

This is either the letter A or the letter B. It is displayed to the right of the arrow.
You must have the correct module type in the selected channel to make a recall.
Local Control - System Mode 4-3

4

If you do not, the message MISMATCH will be shown when you try to make a
recall.
You edit the channel using the Modify keys. The channel that will be set by the
data is the displayed value.
Example
The character eld shows the message RECALL '54 3! A.
You press 4Exec5.
If there is an HP 81554SM in channel A, channel A will be
con gured according to the data in location 3.

4

STORE

The store function stores the instrument con guration in memory. When you
select the store function, the left side character eld shows the message STORE.
There are three parameters for this function. The module type for which the
last save to this location was made, the channel for which the information is to
be saved, and the location where the data is to be saved.
Press 4Edit5 to look at or edit the parameters. All of the parameters are displayed
at the same time in the right side character eld. You can select between the
location and the channel using 4(5 and 4)5. You cannot edit the module type.
While you are editing parameters, the mode-indicator shows MENU SYS EDIT.

Figure 4-2. Editing a Parameter in System Mode
Press 4EXEC5 to make a store with the selected parameters.

4-4 Local Control - System Mode

The Module Type

The module type is shown for the last data that was stored in the selected
location. If no data has been stored in a location, this information is blank. The
module type is indicated by the last two numeric digits of the product number.
The Channel

This is either the letter A or the letter B. It is displayed to the left of the arrow.
You edit the channel using the Modify keys. The channel data that will be saved
is the displayed value.
The Location

The location where the con guration data will be stored is a number between 1
and 9. This number is displayed to the right of the arrow.
You edit the location using the Modify keys. The location used for the recall is
the displayed value.
Example
The character eld shows the message STORE '54 3! A.
You press 4Exec5.
If there is an HP 81554SM in channel A, channel A will be
con gured according to the data in location 3.

HPIB

The HP-IB con guration sets the parameters a ecting how the instrument is
remotely controlled. When you select the HP-IB con guration, the left side
character eld shows the message HPIB.
There are three parameters for this con guration. These are ADDRESS, to set
the HP-IB address of the instrument, MODE, to set the instrument to control or
talk-only operation, and LANGUAGE, to set the type of commands that are used
by the instrument.
Press 4Edit5 to look at or edit the parameters. After pressing 4Edit5, you can
select parameters using 4Next5 and 4Prev5. While you are editing a parameter, the
mode-indicator shows MENU SYS EDIT.
ADDRESS

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
ADDRESS. The right side character eld shows the setting for the device address
of the instrument.
Local Control - System Mode 4-5

4

You edit the address using the Modify keys. The low limit for the address is 0.
The high limit for the address is 30. The address is set to the displayed value.
MODE

4

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
MODE. The right side character eld shows the setting for the HP-IB state of the
instrument.
You edit the state using the Modify keys. MODE can be TLK LSTN, where the
instrument can be fully controlled over the HP-IB, or TLK ONLY, where the
instrument can only issue commands and data over the HP-IB.
The mode is set to the displayed value by pressing 4Exec5 or by switching the
instrument on and o . Pressing 4Exec5 will restart the instrument. If TLK ONLY
has been selected, but not set, running a print or plot application will set this
parameter.
LANGUAGE

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
LANGUAGE. The right side character eld shows the setting for the HP-IB parser
to be used.
You edit the parser type using the Modify keys. LANGUAGE can be TMSL,
where the instrument can be controlled using the Test and Measurement
System Language (TMSL) commands, or HP 8152, where the instrument can be
controlled using the HP 8152A commands.
The chosen language has a beside it. A * beside the name of the language
indicates that it cannot be chosen. The HP 8152A compatibility mode cannot
be selected if the instrument has a source module. If you select HP 8152A
compatibility mode with a source module in the instrument, a * is put beside
the choice. The compatibility mode will become active of the source is removed,
and only sensors remain.
The language is set to the displayed value by pressing 4Exec5 or by switching the
instrument on and o . Pressing 4Exec5 will restart the instrument.
For a list of the TMSL commands, see chapters 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9. For a list of HP
8152A commands see Appendix H.

4-6 Local Control - System Mode

DISPLAY

The display con guration sets the parameters a ecting the display if the
instrument. When you select the display con guration, the left side character
eld shows the message DISPLAY.
There is one parameter for the display. This is BRIGHT, to set the brightness of
the display.
Press 4Edit5 to look at or edit the parameter. While you are editing a parameter,
the mode-indicator shows MENU SYS EDIT.
BRIGHT

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
BRIGHT. The right side character eld shows the brightness as a series of bars.

Figure 4-3. Setting the Brightness of the Display
You edit the brightness using the Modify keys. The brightness is set to the
selected value.

DATETIME

The date and time con guration sets the current date and time on the
instrument. When you select the date and time con guration, the left side
character eld shows the message DATETIME.
There are two parameters for this con guration. These are MM/DD/YY, which
sets the date, and HH:MM:SS, which sets the time.
Local Control - System Mode 4-7

4

Press 4Edit5 to look at or edit the parameters. After pressing 4Edit5, you can
select parameters using 4Next5 and 4Prev5. While you are editing a parameter, the
mode-indicator shows MENU SYS EDIT.
MM/DD/YY

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
MM/DD/YY. The right side character eld shows the setting for the date, in the
format month/day/year.
You edit the date using the Modify keys. The date is set to the displayed value
when you edit it.

4

HH:MM:SS

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
HH:MM:SS. The right side character eld shows the setting for the time, in the
format hours:minutes:seconds.
You edit the time using the Modify keys. The time is set to the displayed value
when you edit it.
Example
The time is 11:25:38
You edit the time so that it shows 11:25:58.
The time is set to 11:25:58 as soon as you nish the edit.
Although the display does not change the time itself changes.
To check this you can change to date and then change to time
again (by pressing 4Next5 twice).

4-8 Local Control - System Mode

5
Programming the HP 8153A
Introduction

This chapter gives general information on how to control the HP 8153A using
the Hewlett-Packard|Interface Bus (HP-IB) and a controller. Descriptions
for the actual commands for the HP 8153A, are in the following chapters.
Programming information is speci c to the HP 8153A, and assumes that you are
already familiar with using the HP-IB. If you are not familiar with the HP-IB,
then refer to the following books:
Hewlett-Packard Company. Tutorial Description of Hewlett-Packard Interface
Bus, 1987.
The International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE
Standard 488.1-1987, IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable

. New York, NY, 1987
The International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
Instrumentation

IEEE

Standard 488.2-1987, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common

. New York, NY, 1987
To obtain a copy of either of these last two documents, write to:
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
345 East 47th Street
New York, NY 10017
USA.
Commands For Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987

Remote Operation 5-1

5

The HP 8153A HP-IB Capabilities

The HP 8153A interfaces to the HP-IB as de ned by the IEEE Standards 488.1
and 488.2. The table shows the interface functional subset that the HP 8153A
implements.

Table 5-1. HP-IB Capabilities
Mnemonic

Function

SH1
AH1
T6
L4
SR1
RL1
PP0
DC1
DT1
C0
E2

Complete source handshake capability
Complete acceptor handshake capability
Basic talker; serial poll; unaddressed to talk if addressed to listen; no talk only
Basic listener; unaddressed to listen if addressed to talk; no listen only
Complete service request capability
Complete remote/local capability
No parallel poll capability
Device clear capability
Device trigger capability (accepted but ignored)
No controller capability
Tristate outputs (except the handshake lines)

5

HP-IB Display Indicators

There are two indicators that you may see in the display when you are
controlling the HP 8153A over the HP-IB.
lights when the HP 8153A is operating over the HP-IB. While
RMT
in remote the only key you can use is 4Local5. If local lockout is
enabled, then you cannot use any keys.
(service request) indicator shows when the HP 8153A has
SRQ
requested service.
NNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNN

5-2 Remote Operation

You cannot control the instrument over the HP-IB if the TLK ONLY indicator is
lit. If this indicator is lit, see \MODE" in Chapter 4 for details on how to change
the HP-IB state.
NNNNNNNNNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Parser

The parser is responsible for reading in messages from the interface, converting
them into commands, and then performing those commands.
Normally, the instrument takes all the incoming data from the interface port
and puts it in the input queue. When all the data is in the queue, it is parsed.
When the input queue is full, and there are additional bytes at the interface, the
parser
1. removes one byte from the input queue
2. parses it,
3. then takes a byte from the interface port and puts it in input queue.
These three steps are repeated until there are no additional bytes at the
interface.

Parser Type

Beside the HP 8153A commands, the instrument also has a parser that can use
the HP 8152A commands. You can only choose between the parsers from the
front panel in system mode, see \LANGUAGE" in Chapter 4.

Synchronization

Most of the commands and queries described are executed when parsed. There
are some exceptions for which execution continues afterward. These fall into
three categories.
1. Trigger commands.
2. Measurement commands.
3. The Zero command.
These commands block further execution in the same channel until they have
nished. Commands in the second channel are executed independently. You can
control synchronization for these commands by using the *OPC, *OPC?, and the
*WAI commands (see Chapter 6 for more details on these commands).
Remote Operation 5-3

5

Note

To make sure that a command has nished executing, check the
Operation Complete bit in the Event Status Register.

Clearing the Input Queue

Switching the power o causes commands that are in the input queue, but have
not been executed to be lost.

Accepted Characters

The table below lists all the characters allowed by the parser.

5

Table 5-2. Accepted Characters
Character
Description

HT, LF, CR, space
\*"
\+"
\,"
\-"
\."
\0" - \9"
\;"
\@" - \Z"
\a" - \z"

HP-IB Bus Commands

White spaces
Block terminator
Plus sign
Item separator
Minus sign / Range separator
Decimal point
Digits / Integer
List terminator
Letters
Lower Case Letters

The table below shows which HP-IB messages are implemented in the parser.

5-4 Remote Operation

Command
DAB
DCL

EOI
GET
GTL
IFC
LAG
LLO
MLA
MTA
PPC
PPD
PPE
PPU
PPOLL
REN
SDC
SPD
SPE
TAD
TCT
UNL
UNT

Table 5-3. HP-IB Bus Commands
Description
Treatment

Data byte
Device clear

End or identify
Group execute trigger
Go to local
Interface clear
Listen address group
Local lock out
My listen address
My talk address
Parallel poll con g.
Parallel poll disable
Parallel poll enable
Parallel poll uncon g.
Parallel poll
Remote enable
Selected device clear
Serial poll disable
Serial poll enable
Talk address
Take control
Unlisten
Untalk

Implemented as usual
Sets 8153 into reset state, see
section \The Parser"
End is treated as white space
Not implemented
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Transparent to the parser
See DCL
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Not implemented
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser

Remote Operation 5-5

5

HP-IB Priority

5

The HP-IB interface has priority over other processes running on the
instrument.
In particular, if you are running a Record application over the HP-IB, you should
not poll the instrument continuously to detect the end of the application.
Instead, you should use interrupts, if this is possible, or make sure that there is
a delay between each poll of the instrument. A programming example, using
interrupts for a stability application, is included in chapter 6, see \Example 6"
in Chapter 10.
If the instrument is accessed over the HP-IB while you are editing a parameter,
the editing will be terminated. For example, if you are editing a system
parameter, an incoming HP-IB access terminates the editing, and blanks the
display; in this case you should press 4Local5 and then 4Menu5 to restore the display
and return the instrument to Measure mode. If the interrupting HP-IB command
is to zero the instrument, then the ZEROING message is lost when the display is
blanked.

TMSL

The HP 8153A uses commands according to the Test and Measurement Systems
Language (TMSL, also known as Standard Commands for Programmable
Instrumentation, SCPI). For an introduction to TMSL/SCPI, and TMSL/SCPI
programming techniques, refer to the following documents:
Hewlett-Packard Press (Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inci). A
Beginners Guide to SCPI. Barry Eppler. 1991.
The SCPI Consortium. Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments.
Published periodically by various publishers. To obtain a copy of this manual,
contact your Hewlett-Packard representative.
A TMSL/SCPI command is a combination of command components. The
commands used by the HP 8153A are given in chapters 7, 8 and 9. These show
the possible command components, and the possible component combinations.
The rst component in one of the command tables is called the root component.
Other components are added to make a command. The way the components are
added is called the command path. It is important to know the current path,
because the same component can be used in di erent paths. In some cases the
5-6 Remote Operation

command contains components which are included to maintain compatibility to
the TMSL Standard.
The command table always starts with a root component. Other components
that are indented to the right can be added to the current path to complete a
command, or to make a new command.
Example
We will use the SOURce Command for our examples. The
command table for SOURce is as follows
SOURce Command

Command

SOURce[1j2]
:AM
[:INTernal]
:FREQuency
:FREQuency?
:POWer
:ATTenuation[1j2]
:ATTenuation[1j2]?
:STATe
:STATe?
:WAVElength
:WAVElength?

Summary
Parameter

[]jCW
[]

UPPerjLOWerjBOTH

An example of a command from this table is
SOURCE:POWER:STATE.
In addition to the components, some commands also need data. A piece of data
is called a parameter.
Separate a command and its parameters by whitespace characters (spaces or
tabs). Use a comma (,) to separate parameters when a command needs more
than one of them.
Example
An example of a command with a parameter is
SOURCE:AM:INTERNAL:FREQUENCY CW.
Put a colon (:) before any component to indicate a move to the next level of
the combination. Put a semi-colon (;) before a component to indicate another
command at the same level of the combination.
Example
An example of using colons and semicolons to save typing is
SOUR:POW:ATT 1.0; STAT ON; WAVE LOW

Remote Operation 5-7

5

This is the same as

SOURCE:POWER:ATTENUATION 1.0
SOURCE:POWER:STATE ON
SOURCE:POWER:WAVELENGTH LOWER

A semi-colon followed by a colon (;:) sets the path back to the root level.
The command can be written in upper case or in lower case.
The components can be typed in full, or they can be shortened. The full version
is in the command table in both upper and lower case letters. The shortened
version of a command is that part which is shown in upper case.
Example
The command
SOURCE:POWER:STATE ON

can also be written in lower case as
source:power:state on

or it can be shortened and written as

5

sour:pow:stat on

Setting the HP-IB Address

You can only set the HP-IB address from the front panel. See \ADDRESS" in
Chapter 4.
The HP-IB refuses to accept a new HP-IB address if it is in the remote state, or
if it is addressed either as a listener or as a talker. Return the HP 8153A to local
control (via controller) before changing the address.
The default HP-IB address is 22.

5-8 Remote Operation

Syntax Diagram Conventions

The following symbols describe the syntax of commands in the following
chapters.
< ... >
The characters between angled brackets show the kind of data
that you require, or that you get in a response. You do not type
the angled brackets in the actual message.
application
is an application name. The names which are
available depend upon the modules installed.
boolean
this can be data (ON or OFF), or a number. Any
non- zero value is an ON. In a response you get
0, for OFF, or 1, for ON.
day
is a number in the range 1 to 28, 1 to 29, 1 to
30 or 1 to 31. It is the day of the month in the
date. The range used depends on the values of
\year" and \month" parameters.
hour
is a number in the range 0 to 23. It is the hours
in the time.
minute
is a number in the range 0 to 59. It is the
minutes in the time.
month
is a number in the range 1 to 12. It is the
month in the date.
node
is a node name. A node is the name of a
position in the structure of the status registers.
second
is a number in the range 1 to 60. It is the
seconds in the time. Setting second to 60 will
automatically increment the other elements of
the time.
string
is ascii data.
unit
is one of DB, DBM, W (Watts), M (meters), or S
(seconds), or one of NW or MW, NM, or MS. It is
the units in a value.
value
is numeric data in one of the forms described
below (NR1, NR2, NR3, or NRf).
Remote Operation 5-9

5

varname

5

is the name of a variable for use with an
application. The varname available depend on
the application.
wsp
is a white space.
year
is a number in the range 1990 to 2089. This is
the years in the date.
Other kinds of data are described as required.
[ ... ]
The characters between square brackets show optional
information that you can include with the message.
j
The bar shows an either-or choice of data, for example, ajb
means either a or b, but not both simultaneously.
All characters not between angled brackets are terminal symbols and must
be sent exactly as shown. Items between angled brackets are non-terminal
symbols, descriptions of these items follow the syntax description. Spaces are
ignored; they can be inserted to improve readability.
The response format speci es what the instrument returns in response to a
query. All responses are terminated with a  with the HP-IB EOI (bus
management line) active.
There are four types of number that are used in responses. These are de ned by
the IEEE standard.
NR1
This is a number of the form [+j-]number where number is any
number of digits without a decimal point.

NR2

Examples of NR1 are 3, +27, -56.
This is a number of the form [+j-]number.number, where
number is any number of digits without a decimal point.

5-10 Remote Operation

NR3

Examples of numbers in NR2 format are 33.23, +15.02376,
-123.098.
This is a number of the form [+j-]number.numberE+j-number,
where number is any number of digits without a decimal point.

5
Examples of numbers in NRf format are 3.27E-56, +33.32E+15,
-0.2376E-11.
NRf
is a number with any of the formats described above.
In this manual we use these format types to describe entered data as well as
response data. A general description of entered data is given in the diagram
here

Remote Operation 5-11

6
Common Commands
The IEEE 488.2 standard has a list of reserved commands, called these common
commands. Some of these commands must be implemented by any instrument
using the standard, others are optional. The HP 8153A implements all the
necessary commands, and some optional ones. This chapter describes the
implemented commands.

Common Status Information

There are four registers involved in the status information available from
the instrument when you use the common commands. Two of these are
status-registers and two are enable-registers. These registers conform to the
IEEE Standard 488.2-1987. You can nd further descriptions of these registers
under \*ESE", \*ESR?", \*SRE", and \*STB?".
The following gure shows how the registers are organized.

Remote Operation - Common Commands 6-1

6

6

Note

Figure 6-1. Common Status Registers
Unused bits in any of the registers return 0 when you read
them.

6-2 Remote Operation - Common Commands

SRQ, The Service Request

A service request (SRQ) is forced when a bit in the Status Byte register goes
from 0 ! 1 AND the corresponding Service Request Enable Mask bit is set.
If an SRQ is forced, the Request Service (RQS) bit is set to 1. This bit remains
at 1 until read by a serial poll, even if the reason or condition that caused the
service request no longer exists. Similarly, if a serial poll reads the RQS it is
reset to 0, even if the condition that caused the service request still exists. The
serial poll command transfers the value of the Status Byte register to a variable.

Input Queue

The input queue is a FIFO queue ( rst-in rst-out) and is 1024 bytes long.

Output Queue

The output queue is a FIFO queue ( rst-in rst-out) and is 274 bytes long.
The message available, Message Available (MAV), bit is set in bit four of the
Status Byte register whenever the output queue is not empty. Receiving a new
program message clears the output queue and the Message Available (MAV) bit.
This happens directly after the program message terminator is received.

Error Queue

The error queue is a FIFO queue ( rst-in rst-out) and is 30 errors long. That is,
the oldest error is the rst error to be read.
If the queue over ows, message '-350 ' overlays the last
message in the queue.

Remote Operation - Common Commands 6-3

6

Table 6-1. Common Command Summary
Command
Function

6

*CLS
*ESE
*ESE?
*ESR?
*IDN?
*OPC
*OPC?
*RST
*SRE
*SRE?
*STB?
*TRG
*TST?
*WAI

Clear Status Command
Standard Event Status Enable Command
Standard Event Status Enable Query
Standard Event Status Register Query
Identi cation Query
Operation Complete Command
Operation Complete Query
Reset Command
Service Request Enable Command
Service Request Enable Query
Read Status Byte Query
Trigger Command
Self Test Query
Wait Command

*CLS

CLear Status command.
Syntax
*CLS
De nition
The *CLS command clears all the event registers
summarized in the Status Byte register. With the
exception of the output queue, all queues that are
summarized in the Status Byte register are emptied. The
error queue is also emptied. Neither the Standard Event
Status Enable register, nor the Service Request Enable
register are a ected by this command.
After the *CLS command the instrument is left in the idle
state. The command does not alter the instrument setting.
*OPC/*OPC? actions are canceled.
Related Command Interface Command SDC
6-4 Remote Operation - Common Commands

Example

OUTPUT 722;"*CLS"

*ESE

standard Event Status Enable command.
Syntax
*ESE  
0  value  255
De nition
The *ESE command sets bits in the Standard Event Status
Enable register and thus enables the corresponding bits
in the Standard Event Status register. A 1 in a bit in the
enable register enables the same bit in the status register.
The value sent as an integer or a oating point number
(NRf).
The register is cleared at power-on. The *RST and *CLS
commands do not change the register.

Table 6-2.
The Standard Event Status Enable Register
BIT
MNEMONIC
Decimal
Value
7
Power On
6
Not used
5
Command Error
4
Execution Error
3 Device Dependent Error
2
Query Error
1
Not used
0
Operation Complete
Related Commands
Example

128
0
32
16
8
4
0
1

*ESE?
OUTPUT 722;"*ESE 21"

Remote Operation - Common Commands 6-5

6

*ESE?

standard Event Status Enable query.
Syntax
*ESE?
Response

0  value  255
De nition
The *ESE? query returns the contents of the Standard
Event Status Enable register (see \*ESE" for information
on this register). The value is returned as an integer
(NR1).
Related Commands *ESE
Example
OUTPUT 722;"*ESE?"
ENTER 722; A$

*ESR?

6

standard Event Status Register query.
Syntax
*ESR?
Response

0  value  255

6-6 Remote Operation - Common Commands

Table 6-3.
The Standard Event Status Register
BITS
MNEMONICS
Decimal
Value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Power On
Not used
Command Error
Execution Error
Device Dependent Error
Query Error
Not used
Operation Complete

128
0
[1]
32
16[2]
8[3]
4[4]
0
1

See \Command Errors" in Appendix I
See \Execution Errors" in Appendix I
[3] See \Device Dependant Errors" in Appendix I
[4] See \Query Errors" in Appendix I
[1]
[2]

De nition

The *ESR? returns the contents of the Standard Event
Status register. The register is cleared after being read.
The value is returned as an integer (NR1).

Example

OUTPUT 722;"*ESR?"
ENTER 722; A$

*IDN?

IDeNti cation query.
Syntax
*IDN?
Response
HEWLETT-PACKARD, 8153A, 0, 1.0

Remote Operation - Common Commands 6-7

6

HEWLETT-PACKARD: manufacturer
8153A: instrument model number
0: means that serial numbers,

are not provided.
1.0: rmware revision level

De nition
Related Commands
Example

The *IDN? query gets the instrument identi cation over
the interface.
*OPT?.
DIM A$ [30]
OUTPUT 722;"*IDN?"
ENTER 722; A$

*OPC

6

OPeration Complete command.
Syntax
*OPC
De nition
The *OPC command parses all program message units in
the input queue and sets the operation complete bit in the
Standard Event Status register, when the contents of the
input queue have been processed.
The following actions cancel the *OPC command (and put
the instrument into Operation Complete, Command Idle
State):
Power-on
the Device Clear Active State is asserted on the
interface.
*CLS
*RST

Related Commands
Example

*OPC?, *WAI
OUTPUT 722;"*CLS;*ESE 1;*SRE 32"
OUTPUT 722;"*OPC"

6-8 Remote Operation - Common Commands

*OPC?

OPeration Complete query.
Syntax
*OPC?
Response

value = 1
De nition
The *OPC? command parses all program message units in
the input queue, sets the operation complete bit in the
Standard Event Status register, and places an ASCII '1' in
the output queue, when the contents of the input queue
have been processed.
The following actions cancel the *OPC? query (and put
the instrument into Operation Complete, Command Idle
State):
Power-on
the Device Clear Active State is asserted on the
interface.
*CLS

6

*RST

Related Commands
Example

*OPC, *WAI
OUTPUT 722;"*OPC?"
ENTER 722;A$

Note that this query prevents the use of the input queue
because it is immediately followed by an ENTER command.
The ENTER command will not execute until it receives
data from the output queue.

*OPT?

OPTion identi cation query.
Syntax
*OPT?
Response
,
The string contains the product number of the module
in the channel. The rst string returns the module in
Remote Operation - Common Commands 6-9

De nition
Related Commands
Example

channel A, the second string returns the module in
channel B. EMPTY is returned if a slot contains no
module.
The *OPT? query gets the instrument to identify its
installed options over the interface.
*IDN?.
DIM A$ [20]
OUTPUT 722;"*OPT?"
ENTER 722; A$

If the installed modules were a HP 81554SM and a HP
81530A, the returned string would be HP81554SM,HP
81530A.

*RST

ReSeT command.
Syntax
De nition

6

*RST

The *RST command sets the instrument to reset setting
(standard setting) stored in ROM.
Pending *OPC/*OPC? actions are canceled.
Instrument state: the instrument is placed in the idle
state awaiting a command.
The *RST command clears the key queue.
The following are not changed:
HP-IB (interface) state
Instrument interface address
Output queue
Service Request Enable register (SRE)
Standard Event Status Enable register (ESE)
The following table lists the commands and parameters of
the reset state.

6-10 Remote Operation - Common Commands

Table 6-4. Reset State (Standard Setting)
Commands
Parameters
(Default)

DISPlay:BRIGhtness
DISPlay:STATe
SENSe:POWer:ATIME
SENSe:POWer:RANGe:AUTO
SENSe:POWer:WAVElength
SENSe:POWer:REFerence
SENSe:POWer:REFerence
SENSe:POWer:REFerence
SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe
SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe:RATIo
SENSe:POWer:UNIT
SENSe:CORRection
ABORt
ABORt2
INITiate:CONTinuous
INITiate2:CONTinuous
SOURce:AM:INTernal:FREQuency
SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation
SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation2
SOURce:POWer:STATe
SOURce:POWer:WAVElength

Example

Notes

1
ON
200MS
ON

sensor only
sensor only
module dependent
TOREF, 0dBm sensor only
TOB, 0
two sensors only
TOA, 0
two sensors only
OFF
sensor only
TOREF
sensor only
W
sensor only
0.0DB
sensor only
sensor only
Ch. B sensor only
OFF
sensor only
OFF
Ch. B sensor only
CW
source only
0.0DB
source only
0.0DB
dual  source
OFF
source only
LOWER
dual  source

OUTPUT 722;"*RST"

*SRE

Service Request Enable command.
Syntax
*SRE  
0  value  255
De nition
The *SRE command sets bits in the Service Request
Enable register. A 1 in a bit in the enable register enables
the corresponding bit in the status register. The value sent
as an integer or a oating point number (NRf).
The register is cleared at power-on. The *RST and *CLS
commands do not change the register.
Remote Operation - Common Commands 6-11

6

Table 6-5. The Service Request Enable Register
MNEMONICS
Decimal
Value

BITS
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Operation Status
Request Service (RQS)/Master Summary Status (MSS)
Event Status Bit (ESB)
Message Available (MAV)
Questionable Status
Not used
Not used
Source Status

Related Commands
Example

*SRE?, *STB?
OUTPUT 722;"*SRE 48"

*SRE?
6

Service Request Enable query.
Syntax
*SRE?
Response
0  value  255
De nition
The *SRE? query returns the contents of the Service
Request Enable register. (See \*SRE" for information
on the Service Request Enable register). The value is
returned as an integer (NR1).
Related Commands *SRE, *STB?
Example
OUTPUT 722;"*SRE?"
ENTER 722; A$

6-12 Remote Operation - Common Commands

128
64
32
16
8
0
0
1

*STB?

STatus Byte query.
Syntax
Response

*STB?



0  value  255

Table 6-6. The Status Byte Register
BITS
MNEMONICS
Decimal
Value
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
De nition

Related Commands
Example

Operational Status
Master Summary Status (MSS)
Event Status Bit (ESB)
Message Available (MAV)
Questionable Status
Not used
Not used
Source Status

128
64
32
16
8
0
0
0

The *STB? query returns the contents of the Status Byte
register. The register is programmed via the Service
Request Enable Mask. For setting this mask, see \*SRE".
The value is returned as an integer (NR1).
The STATus commands nd the exact cause of an error.
These are described in Chapter 7.
The Master Summary Status (MSS) bit is true when any
enabled bit of the STB register is set (excluding Bit 6).
The Status Byte register including, the master summary
bit, MSS, is not directly altered because of an *STB?
query.
*SRE, *SRE?
OUTPUT 722;"*STB?"
ENTER 722; A$
Remote Operation - Common Commands 6-13

6

*TRG

TRiGger command.
Syntax
De nition

Related Commands
Example

*TRG

The *TRG command has the same e ect as the interface
command \Group Execute Trigger" (GET). The command
triggers any event that was suspended waiting for a
trigger.
Interface Command GET, INIT, INIT:CONT, INIT:CONT?
OUTPUT 722;"*TRG"

*TST?

self-TeST query.
Syntax
Response

6

De nition

Example

*TST?



value = 0j1
A value of zero means no errors.
The *TST? query makes the instrument perform a self-test
and place the results of the test in the output queue.
No further commands are allowed while the test is
running. After the self-test the instrument is returned to
the setting that was active at the time the self-test query
was processed.
OUTPUT 722;"*TST?"
ENTER 722; A$

*WAI

WAIt command.
Syntax
De nition

*WAI

The *WAI command prevents the instrument from
executing any further commands until the current
command has nished executing. All pending operations
are completed during the wait period.

6-14 Remote Operation - Common Commands

Related Commands
Example

*OPC, *OPC?
OUTPUT 722;"*WAI"

6

Remote Operation - Common Commands 6-15

7
HP-IB Status Commands
This chapter gives a list of the HP 8153A HP-IB commands and queries used for
determining the status of the instrument.

The Status Registers

The building blocks of the status information circuitry are three types of
register, and two kinds of transition lters. These registers and lters are
grouped together to make a node. Each node has a condition register, a positive
transition register, a negative transition register, an event register and an enable
register.

7

Note

Figure 7-1. The Registers and Filters in a Node
The most signi cant bit of these registers is not used. That is,
these registers use only bits 0 to 14.

Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-1

The Condition Registers

You can read a condition register at any time to nd the current status of the
node. It is updated continuously. Reading a condition register does not change
its contents.

The Transition Filters

The transition lters are of two types, a positive transition lter and a negative
transition lter. A 1 in a bit of the transition lter enables that bit.
An enabled bit in a positive transition lter generates a 1 at the output when
the input goes from 0 to 1.
An enabled bit in a negative transition lter generates a 1 at the output when
the input goes from 1 to 0.
The condition register provides the input to the lters. The output is sent to the
event register.
At power up, all of the bits in both transition registers are set to 0. That is, no
transitions are passed to the event registers.

The Event Registers

The outputs from the transition lters set the bits in the event register. These
bits are only cleared when the register is read, otherwise they stay as they are.

7

The Enable Registers

The enable register selects which bits a ect the next stage of registers. A 1 in a
bit in the enable register, means that the corresponding bit in the event register
is enabled. The enabled bits are ORed together and the result is sent to the
condition register in the next node.
At power up, all of the bits in the enable registers are set to 0.

7-2 Remote Operation - Status Commands

The Status Commands

The registers and lters described above, are present in each node of the status
structure (the full structure is given later in this chapter). Each node has the
same set of commands and queries. These commands and queries are listed here
once to avoid repetition.

Note
Note

You can only use these commands and queries with a node
speci cation. The syntax element  means any of the
node speci cations.
The commands and queries are given in upper and lower
case. You can use either the entire command or query (both
upper and lower case), or just the part that is in upper case.
That is, either STATUS:OPERATION:SETTLING:EVENT? or
STAT:OPER:SETT:EVEN? is acceptable.
The commands and queries can be entered in either upper
or lower case. That is either STAT:OPER:SETT:EVEN? or
stat:oper:sett:even? is acceptable.

STATus:PRESet
Syntax

Note
Description

STATus:PRESet

You do not specify a node with this command.

7
This command presets all the enable registers and
transition lters for all nodes of the OPERational and
QUEStionable status.
The OPERational, QUEStionable, and ISUMmary nodes are
set:

Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-3

Register All bits set to
ENABle
PTRansition
NTRansition

0
1
0

The OPERation:CORRecting:ZERO,
OPERation:AVERaging:POWer,
OPERation:MEASure:POWer and any
OPERation:POWer: nodes are
set:

Register All bits set to
ENABle
PTRansition
NTRansition

1
0
1

All other nodes are set:

Register All bits set to
ENABle
PTRansition
NTRansition

7

Related Commands
Example

1
1
0

None.
OUTPUT 722;"STAT:PRES"

STATus::CONDition?
Syntax
Response

Description
Related Commands

STATus::CONDition?



0  value  32767
This query returns the value for the condition register for
the node. The value is returned as an integer (NR1).
None.

7-4 Remote Operation - Status Commands

Example

OUTPUT 722;"STAT:OPER:TRIG:POW:COND?"
ENTER 722;A$

STATus::ENABle
Syntax
Description

Related Commands
Example

STATus::ENABle 

0  value  32767
This command sets the enable register for the node. You
send the value as an integer (NRf). A 1 in any bit of this
register enables that bit in the event register. All the
enabled bits are ORed together and the result of this OR is
sent to the next node.
STAT::ENAB?
OUTPUT 722;"STAT:OPER:TRIG:POW:ENAB 3"

STATus::ENABle?
Syntax
Response

Description
Related Commands
Example

STATus::ENABle?



0  value  32767
This query returns the setting for the enable register for
the node. The value is returned as an integer (NR1).
STAT::ENAB
OUTPUT 722;"STAT:QUES:POW:ENAB?"
ENTER 722;A$

STATus:[:EVENt]?
Syntax
Response

Description

STATus:[:EVENt]?



0  value  32767
This query returns the value for the event register for the
node. The value is returned as an integer (NR1). Once
you have read the event register, its contents are cleared.
Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-5

7

Related Commands
Example

None.
OUTPUT 722;"STAT:OPER:SETT:EVEN?"
ENTER 722;A$

STATus::NTRansition
Syntax

Description

Related Commands
Example

STATus::NTRansition 

0  value  32767
This command sets the negative transition lter for the
node. You send the value as an integer (NRf). A 1 in any
bit of this register enables the negative transition. That is,
if a bit is set to 1 and the corresponding bit at the input
changes from 1 to 0, the output goes to 1.
STAT::NTR?
OUTPUT 722;"STAT:QUES:POW:OVERR:NTR 3"

STATus::NTRansition?
Syntax
Response
Description

7

Related Commands
Example

STATus::NTRansition?



0  value  32767
This query returns the value for the setting of the
negative transition lter for the node. The value is
returned as an integer (NR1).
STAT::NTR
OUTPUT 722;"STAT:QUES:ISUM:INST1:NTR?"
ENTER 722;A$

STATus::PTRansition
Syntax
Description

STATus::PTRansition 

0  value  32767
This command sets the positive transition lter for the
node. You send the value as an integer (NRf). A 1 in any
bit of this register enables the negative transition. That is,

7-6 Remote Operation - Status Commands

Related Commands
Example

if a bit is set to 1 and the corresponding bit at the input
changes from 0 to 1, the output goes to 1.
STAT::PTR?
OUTPUT 722;"STAT:QUES:POW:PTR 3"

STATus::PTRansition?
Syntax
Response
Description
Related Commands
Example

STATus::PTRansition?



0  value  32767
This query returns the value for the setting of the positive
transition lter for the node. The value is returned as an
integer (NR1).
STAT::PTR
OUTPUT 722;"STAT:QUES:POW:OVERR:PTR?"
ENTER 722;A$

The Operation Status

The operation status is that part of the status structure that shows the normal
operation of the instrument. The relationship between the nodes of the
operation status is shown in Figure 7-2. Each node (except the status byte) is
sixteen bits wide. Only 15 of these bits are used. Each node (except the status
byte) has it's own condition, event and enable registers, and it's own transition
lters. These registers and lters are described earlier in this chapter.

Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-7

7

7

Figure 7-2. The Operation Registers

7-8 Remote Operation - Status Commands

The Operation Status Commands

The following is a complete list of the operation status commands and queries.
These commands and queries are available, without regard to the con guration
of the instrument. Some nodes are only active with certain modules. For
example, the averaging registers are not used if the instrument has two source
modules. Here, you can read the averaging event register, but it always returns
a 0.

Table 7-1. STATus Command Summary
Command
Parameter

z is being used as shorthand for
:CONDition?
:ENABle
:ENABle?
[:EVENt]?
:NTRansition
:NTRansition?
:PTRansition

STATus
:OPERation z
:SETTling z
:LPELTier z
:HPELTier z
:MEASuring z
:POWer z
:TRIGger z
:POWer z
:CORRecting z
:ZERO z
:AVERaging z
:POWer z
:PROGram z
:





7

z

Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-9

The OPERation node

Here we deal with each node. Refer to \The Status Commands" as well as
this section, to build a full description of the commands and queries that are
available.

Note

Unused bits in any of the registers return 0 when you read
them.

The OPERation node gives a summary of the other operation nodes.

BIT

7

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

The OPERation Node
MNEMONIC Decimal
Value
Not used
PROGram Node
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
AVERaging Node
CORRecting Node
Not used
TRIGger Node
MEASuring Node
Not used
Not used
SETTling Node
Not used

0
16384
0
0
0
0
0
256
128
0
32
16
0
0
2
1

A 1 means this operation is taking place, or has taken place. Bit 7 of the status
byte summarizes this node.

7-10 Remote Operation - Status Commands

The OPERation:SETTling Node

This node gives a summary of the peltier settling nodes. Bit 0 returns the status
of the LPELTier node. Bit 1 returns the status of the HPELTier node. The
HPELTier node is only active for a dual wavelength source module, the other
modules use only LPELTier. A 1 means that the instrument is settling or has
settled. Bit 1 of the OPERation node summarizes this node.
The OPERation:SETTling:LPELTier Node

This node gives a summary of the peltier settling. Bit 0 returns the status of
the peltier settling of the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns the status of
the peltier settling of the module in channel B. A 1 means that the module is
settling or has settled. Bit 0 of the OPERation:SETTling node summarizes this
node.
The OPERation:SETTling:HPELTier Node

This node gives a summary of the peltier settling for the higher wavelength
of a dual wavelength source. Bit 0 returns the status of the peltier settling
for the higher wavelength of the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns the
status of the peltier settling for the higher wavelength of the module in
channel B. A 1 means that the module is settling or has settled. Bit 1 of the
OPERation:SETTling node summarizes this node.

The OPERation:MEASuring Node

This node gives a summary of the measuring status. Bit 0 returns the status of
the POWer node. Bit 4 of the OPERation node summarizes this node.
The OPERation:MEASuring:POWer Node

This node gives a summary of the power measurements. Bit 0 returns the
status of the power measuring of the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns
the status of the power measuring of the module in channel B. a 1 means
that a power measurement is taking place or has taken place. Bit 0 of the
OPERation:MEASuring node summarizes this node.

Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-11

7

The OPERation:TRIGger Node

This node gives a summary of the triggering status. Bit 0 returns the status
of the POWer node. A 1 means that the instrument is triggering, or has been
triggered. Bit 5 of the OPERation node summarizes this node.
The OPERation:TRIGger:POWer Node

This node gives a summary of the triggering. Bit 0 returns the status of the
triggering of the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns the status of the triggering
of the module in channel B. A 1 means that the instrument is triggering, or has
been triggered. Bit 0 of the OPERation:TRIGger node summarizes this node.

The OPERation:CORRecting Node

This node gives a summary of the correcting status. Bit 0 returns the status of
the ZERO node. A 1 means that a correction is being made, or has been made.
Bit 7 of the OPERation node summarizes this node.
The OPERation:CORRecting:ZERO Node

This node gives a summary of the zeroing, that is the removal of electrical
o sets. Bit 0 returns the status of the zeroing of the module in channel A. Bit
1 returns the status of the zeroing of the module in channel B. A 1 means that
zeroing is taking place, or has taken place. Bit 0 of the OPERation:CORRecting
node summarizes this node.

The OPERation:AVERaging Node
7

This node gives a summary of the averaging status. Bit 0 returns the status
of the POWer node. A means that readings are being averaged, or have been
averaged. Bit 8 of the OPERation node summarizes this node.
The OPERation:AVERaging:POWer Node

This node gives a summary of the power averaging, that is the result is an
average of a number of results. Bit 0 returns the status of the averaging of the
module in channel A. Bit 1 returns the status of the averaging of the module in
channel B. A 1 means that averaging is taking place, or has taken place. Bit 0 of
the OPERation:AVERaging node summarizes this node.

7-12 Remote Operation - Status Commands

The OPERation:PROGram Node

This node gives a summary of the application status. Each bit returns the
status of an  node. Bit 0 represents the LOGGing application.
Bit 1 represents the STABility application. Module applications are returned
in other bits. The bit used by a module application is available with each the
module. A 1 means that the application is running, or has been run. Bit 14 of
the OPERation node summarizes this node.
The OPERation:PROGram:

 Node

This node gives a summary of the application. Bit 0 returns the status for this
application in channel A. Bit 1 returns the status for this application in channel
B. A 1 means that this application is running, or has run.

The Questionable Status

The questionable status is that part of the status showing an abnormal state in
the operation of the instrument. The relationship between the nodes is shown
in the following gure. Each node (except the status byte) is sixteen bits wide.
Only 15 of these bits are used. Each node (except the status byte) has it's own
condition, event and enable registers, and it's own transition lters.

7

Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-13

7

Figure 7-3. The Questionable Registers

7-14 Remote Operation - Status Commands

The Questionable Status Commands

The following is a complete list of the questionable status commands and
queries. These commands and queries are available, without regard to the
con guration of the instrument.

Table 7-2. STATus Command Summary
Command
Parameter

z is being used as shorthand for
:CONDition?
:ENABle
:ENABle?
[:EVENt]?
:NTRansition
:NTRansition?
:PTRansition

STATus
:QUEStionable z
:POWer z
:OVERRange z
:LCURRent z
:HCURRent z
:LMONitor z
:HMONitor z
:ENVTemp z
:ISUMmary z
:INSTrument[1j2]
:POWer z





z

7

Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-15

The QUEStionable node

Here we deal with each node. Refer to \The Status Commands" as well as
this section, to build a full description of the commands and queries that are
available.

Note

Unused bits in any of the registers return 0 when you read
them.

The QUEStionable node gives a summary of the other questionable nodes.

The QUEStionable Node
BIT MNEMONIC Decimal
Value

7

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Not used
Not used
ISUMmary Node
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
POWer Node
Not used
Not used
Not used

0
0
8192
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0

A 1 means that there is an error condition, or there has been one. Bit 3 of the
status byte summarizes this node.

7-16 Remote Operation - Status Commands

The QUEStionable:POWer Node

This node gives a summary of the power nodes.

The QUEStionable:POWer Node
BIT MNEMONIC Decimal
Value
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
ENVTemp
HMONitor
LMONitor
HCURRent
LCURRent
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
OVERRange

0
0
0
0
0
1024
512
256
128
64
0
0
0
0
0
1

A 1 means that there is a problem, or has that there has been one. Bit 3 of the
QUEStionable node summarizes this node.
The QUEStionable:POWer:OVERRange Node

This node gives a summary of the power overrange status. Bit 0 returns the
status of the power overrange of the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns the
status of the power overrange of the module in channel B. This node deals only
with sensor modules. A 1 means that power is overrange is taking place, or was
overrange. This node is summarized in bit 0 of the QUEStionable:POWer node.
The QUEStionable:POWer:LCURRent Node

This node gives a summary of the laser current. For a dual wavelength source,
this is the current for the lower wavelength laser. Bit 0 returns the status of the
current for the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns the status of the current for
the module in channel B. A 1 means the current is out of range or was out of
Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-17

7

range. When the laser current is out of range, the laser switches o . Bit 6 of
the QUEStionable:POWer node summarizes this node.
The QUEStionable:POWer:HCURRent Node

This node gives a summary of the laser current for the higher wavelength of a
dual wavelength source. Bit 0 returns the status of the current for the higher
wavelength of the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns the status of the current
for the higher wavelength of the module in channel B. A 1 means that the laser
current is out of range or was out of range. When the laser current is out of
range, the laser switches o . Bit 7 of the QUEStionable:POWer node summarizes
this node.
The QUEStionable:POWer:LMONitor Node

This node gives a summary of the laser monitor current. For a dual wavelength
source, this is the monitor current for the lower wavelength laser. Bit 0 returns
the status of the monitor current for the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns the
status of the monitor current for the module in channel B. A 1 means that the
laser monitor current is currently out of range or was out of range. This node is
summarized bit 8 of the QUEStionable:POWer node.
The QUEStionable:POWer:HMONitor Node

7

This node gives a summary of the laser monitor current for the higher
wavelength of a dual wavelength source. Bit 0 returns the status of the monitor
current for the higher wavelength of the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns
the status of the monitor current for the higher wavelength of the module in
channel B. A 1 means that the laser monitor current is currently out of range
or was out of range. When the laser monitor current is out of range, the laser
switches o . Bit 9 of the QUEStionable:POWer node summarizes this node.
The QUEStionable:POWer:ENVTemp Node

This node gives a summary of the laser environmental temperature. Bit 0
returns the status of the environmental temperature of the module in channel
A. Bit 1 returns the status of the environmental temperature of the module in
channel B. A 1 means that the laser environmental temperature is currently
out of range or was out of range. When the laser environmental temperature
is out of range, the laser switches o . Bit 10 of the QUEStionable:POWer node
summarizes this node.

7-18 Remote Operation - Status Commands

The QUEStionable:ISUMmary Node

This node gives a summary of the instrument status. Bit 1 returns the status of
the module in channel A. Bit 2 returns the status of the module in channel B. A
1 means that there is a problem or was a problem. Bit 13 of the QUEStionable
node summarizes this node.
The QUEStionable:ISUMmary:INSTrument[1j2] Node

This node gives a summary of the module status for either channel A or
channel B. The QUES:ISUM:INST1 node refers to the module in channel A,
the QUES:ISUM:INST2 node refers to the module in channel B. Channel A is
the default when you do not specify a channel. The summary is in bit 3 of
the node. A 1 means that there is a problem or there was a problem. This
node is summarized in the QUEStionable:ISUMmary node. Channel A (INST1)is
summarized in Bit 1, channel B (INST2) is summarized in bit 2.
The QUEStionable:ISUMmary:INSTrument[1j2]:POWer Node. This node gives
the module status.

The QUEStionable:ISUMmary:INSTrument[1j2]:POWer Node
BIT MNEMONIC Decimal
Value
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
ENVTemp
HMONitor
LMONitor
HCURRent
LCURRent
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
OVERRange

0
0
0
0
0
1024
512
256
128
64
0
0
0
0
0
1

Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-19

7

For the meaning of the individual bits, see to the sections \The
QUEStionable:POWer:OVERRange Node", \The QUEStionable:POWer:LCURRent
Node", \The QUEStionable:POWer:HCURRent Node", \The
QUEStionable:POWer:LMONitor Node", \The QUEStionable:POWer:HMONitor
Node", and \The QUEStionable:POWer:ENVTemp Node". A 1
means that there is a problem or was a problem. Bit 3 of the
QUEStionable:ISUMmary:INSTrument node summarizes this node.

The Source Status

The source status is that part of the status structure that shows the operation of
any source modules in the instrument. The node is sixteen bits wide. Only 15 of
these bits are used. The node has it's own condition, event and enable registers,
and it's own transition lters. These registers and lters are described earlier in
this chapter.

7
Figure 7-4. The Source Register

The Source Status Commands The following are the source
status

commands and queries. These commands and queries are available, without
regard to the con guration of the instrument, even when there are no sources
installed. In this case you can read the registers, but they always return a 0.

7-20 Remote Operation - Status Commands

5> STATus

Table 7-3. STATus Command Summary
Command
Parameter
4> :SOURce

3> :CONDition?
3> :ENABle
3> :ENABle?

3> [:EVENt]?
3> :NTRansition 
3> :NTRansition?
3> :PTRansition 

The SOURce node

Refer to \The Status Commands" as well as this section, to build a full
description of the commands and queries that are available.

Note

Unused bits in any of the registers return 0 when you read
them.

The SOURce node gives a summary of the operation of the sources. Bit 0
returns the status of the source for the module in channel A. Bit 1 returns the
status of the source for the module in channel B. A 1 means that the source is
on. Bit 0 of the Status byte summarizes this node.

Remote Operation - Status Commands 7-21

7

8
HP-IB Commands
This chapter gives a list of the HP 8153A HP-IB commands.
The commands are grouped according to the modules to which they refer. A list
of the extra commands for a module are supplied with that module. Install the
relevant pages into this chapter each time you add a module to your system.

ABORt Commands

This is one of the commands that relates to the triggering of sensor modules.

Table 8-1. ABORt Command Summary
Command Parameter
ABORt[1j2]

Specifying the Channel

You specify the channel by attaching a numeric sux to the mnemonic. You
access channel A by using ABORt1, you access channel B by using ABORt2. If do
not add a sux to the mnemonic, channel A is assumed.

ABORt
Syntax
Description
Related Commands
Example

ABORt[1j2]

This command aborts the measurement being made.
INIT:IMM, INIT:CONT, INIT:CONT?
OUTPUT 722;"ABOR"

Remote Operation - Commands 8-1

8

DISPlay Commands

Any function that is related to the instrument display is included with the
mainframe display commands.

Table 8-2. DISPlay Command Summary
Command Parameter Note
DISPlay
:BRIGhtness 
w/o unit
:BRIGhtness?
[:STATe]

[:STATe]?

DISPlay:BRIGhtness
Syntax
Description

Related Commands
Example

8

DISPlay:BRIGhtness 

0  value  1
This command sets the brightness of the display. The
brightness is a oating point number (NRf) that can be set
within the range 0 (lowest intensity) to 1 (full intensity).
The default (for example, after a *RST command) is for
the brightness to be set to 1.
There are seven possible levels of intensity. So the value
input for the brightness is rounded to the closest of seven
values.
DISP:BRIG?, DISP:STAT, DISP:STAT?
OUTPUT 722;"DISP:BRIG 0.5"

DISPlay:BRIGhtness?
Syntax
Response

DISPlay:BRIGhtness?



0  value  1

8-2 Remote Operation - Commands

Description

Related Commands
Example

This command returns the brightness of the display. The
brightness can be within the range 0 to 1. Where 0 means
that the display is at it's lowest intensity, and 1 that it is
full intensity.
DISP:BRIG, DISP:STAT, DISP:STAT?
OUTPUT 722;"DISP:BRIG?"
ENTER 722;A$

DISPlay:STATe
Syntax
Description

Related Commands
Example

DISPlay[:STATe] 

This command switches the display on or o .
DISP:STAT ON switches the display on.
DISP:STAT OFF switches the display o .
The default (for example, after a *RST command) is for
the display to be on.
DISP:BRIG, DISP:BRIG?, DISP:STAT?
OUTPUT 722;"DISP:STAT ON"

DISPlay:STATe?
Syntax
Response
Description
Related Commands
Example

DISPlay[:STATe]?



This command returns the state of the display. 0 means
that the display is o . 1 means that the display is on.
DISP:BRIG, DISP:BRIG?, DISP:STAT
OUTPUT 722;"DISP:STAT?"
ENTER 722;A$

8

Remote Operation - Commands 8-3

FETCh Commands

This command relates to measuring signals with the sensor modules.

Table 8-3. FETCh Command Summary
Command Parameter
FETCh[1j2]
[:SCALar]

:POWER
[:DC]?

Specifying the Channel

You specify the channel by attaching a numeric sux to the FETCh mnemonic.
You access channel A by using FETCh1, you access channel B by using FETCh2.
If you do not add a sux to the mnemonic, channel A is assumed.

FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer[:DC]
Syntax
Response
Description

8

FETCh[1j2][:SCALar]:POWer[:DC]?



This command gets a reading from the module. It does
not provide it's own triggering and so must be used with
either a continuous or a preceding immediate trigger. The
value read back is a oating point number in exponential
number (NR3). The units of the number read back depend
on whether the absolute or relative measurement mode
is being used, and which units have been selected. The
possible units are Watts, dBm, or dB.
For averaging times of 1 second or less, a new
measurement is available at the end of the averaging
time. This is drawn in Figure 8-1. A measurement is
available at the rst x if an immediate trigger is used.
A measurement is available display at each x when
continuous triggering is used.

8-4 Remote Operation - Commands

Figure 8-1. Measurements with TAverage  1 second
For averaging times of more than 1 second, the x value is
given by the formula




Tsample
1 0 Tsample
+ Sample
xnew = xold
Tavg

Tavg

Where
xnew
xold
Sample
Tavg
Tsample

is the new result,
is the previous result,
is the value read by the hardware,
is the averaging time (as set by the user), and
is the time taken, by the hardware, to make a
reading.
When a continuous trigger is used for averaging times of
more than 1 second, the rst measurement is available at
the end of the averaging time. The second measurement
is available 1 second later, and a new measurement is
available every second after that. Each of these new
measurements is the average for the readings of the
preceding period. This is shown in Figure 8-2, TAverage
is 5s. First measurement is available at x1 , which is the
average for readings in the period TAverage . The second
measurement is available at x2, and so on.

8
Figure 8-2.
Measurements with TAverage > 1 second, continuous triggering.
Remote Operation - Commands 8-5

When an immediate trigger is used for averaging times of
more than 1 second, the rst measurement is available at
the end of the averaging time. The second measurement
is available again at the end of the averaging time (once
another trigger has been made), and so on. This is shown
in Figure 8-3, TAverage is 5s. First measurement is available
at x1 , which is the average for readings in the period T1 .
The second measurement is available at x2, which is the
average for the readings in the period T2 . Again in this
case, the value is calculated by the formula




Tsample
1 0 Tsample
+ Sample
xnew = xold
Tavg

Where
xnew
xold
Sample
Tavg
Tsample

Tavg

is the new result,
is the previous result,
is the value read by the hardware,
is the averaging time (as set by the user), and
is the time taken, by the hardware, to make a
reading.

Figure 8-3.
Measurements with TAverage > 1 second, immediate triggering.

8

Related Commands

READ:SCAL:POW:DC?, SENS:POW:REF:STAT,
SENS:POW:REF:STAT? SENS:POW:UNIT, SENS:POW:UNIT?,
INIT:IMM, INIT:CONT, INIT:CONT?

Example

OUTPUT 722;"FETC:POW?"
ENTER 722;A$

8-6 Remote Operation - Commands

INITiate Commands

This is one of the commands that relates to the triggering of sensor modules.

Table 8-4. INITiate Command Summary
Command Parameter
INITiate[1j2]
:CONTinuous 
:CONTinuous?
[:IMMediate]

Specifying the Channel

You specify the channel by attaching a numeric sux to the mnemonic. You
access channel A by using INITiate1, you access channel B by using or
INITiate2. If do not add a sux to the mnemonic, channel A is assumed.

INITiate:CONTinuous
Syntax
Description
Related Commands
Example

INITiate[1j2]:CONTinuous'' 

This command initiates the trigger system for continuous
trigger operation, that is, measurements are made
continuously.
ABOR, INIT:IMM, INIT:CONT?
OUTPUT 722;"INIT1:CONT OFF"

INITiate:CONTinuous?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands

INITiate[1j2]:CONTinuous?''



This command returns whether the triggering system is
operating continuously or not. The status is returned as
either 0 or 1. 0 means that continuous triggering is not
selected. 1 means that continuous triggering is selected.
ABOR, INIT:IMM, INIT:CONT

Remote Operation - Commands 8-7

8

Example

OUTPUT 722;"INIT:CONT?"
ENTER 722;A$

INITiate[:IMMediate]
Syntax
Description
Related Commands
Example

INITiate[1j2][:IMMediate]''

This command initiates the trigger system and completes
one full trigger cycle, that is, one measurement is made.
ABOR, INIT:CONT, INIT:CONT
OUTPUT 722;"INIT2"

READ Commands

These commands relate to measuring signals with the sensor modules.

Table 8-5. READ Command Summary
Command Parameter
READ[1j2]
[:SCALar]

:POWER
[:DC]?

Specifying the Channel

You specify the channel by attaching a numeric sux to the or READ mnemonic.
You access channel A by using READ1, you access channel B by using READ2. If
you do not add a sux to the mnemonic, channel A is assumed.

8

READ[:SCALar]:POWer[:DC]
Syntax
Response
Description

READ[1j2][:SCALar]:POWer[:DC]?



This command gets a reading from the module. This
command provides it's own triggering and does not need
a triggering command. The value read back is a oating

8-8 Remote Operation - Commands

Related Commands
Example

point number in exponential number (NR3). The units of
the number read back depend on whether the absolute or
relative measurement mode is being used, and which units
have been selected. The possible units are Watts, dBm, or
dB.
Each new measurement is available at the end of the
averaging time.
FETC:SCAL:POW:DC?, INIT, INIT:CONT, INIT:CONT?,
SENS:POW:REF:STAT, SENS:POW:REF:STAT?
SENS:POW:UNIT, SENS:POW:UNIT?
OUTPUT 722;"READ:POW?"
ENTER 722;A$

SENSe Commands

Sense commands include most of the functions for setting up and using the
sensor modules.

8

Remote Operation - Commands 8-9

Table 8-6. SENSe Command Summary
Command
Parameter
SENSe[1j2]

8

:CORRection
:COLLect
:ZERO
:ZERO?
[:LOSS
[:INPut
[:MAGNitude]]]
[:MAGNitude]]]?
:POWer
:ATIME
:ATIME?
:RANGe
:AUTO
:AUTO?
[:UPPER]
[:UPPER]?
:REFerence
:REFerence?
:DISPlay
:STATe
:STATe?
:RATIo
:RATIo?
:UNIT
:UNIT?
:WAVElength
:WAVElength?



Note

cal factor
cal factor

[]

[]
TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2,[]
TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2
TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2
no query

TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2


[]

8-10 Remote Operation - Commands

Specifying the Channel

You specify the channel by attaching a numeric sux to the SENSe mnemonic.
You access channel A by using SENSe1, and channel B by using SENSe2. If you
do not add a sux to the mnemonic, channel A is assumed.

SENSe:CORRection:COLLect:ZERO
Syntax
Description
Related Commands
Example

SENSe[1j2]:CORRection:COLLect:ZERO''

This command zeros the electrical o sets for the module.
SENS:CORR:COLL:ZERO?
OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:CORR:COLL:ZERO"

SENSe:CORRection:COLLect:ZERO?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands
Example

SENSe[1j2]:CORRection:COLLect:ZERO?''



This command returns the status of the most recent zero
command. 0 means that the zero succeeded without
errors. 1 means that no remote zeroing operation has
been performed. Any other value means that the remote
zeroing failed, the value is the error code returned
from the zero operation. The error codes are listed in
Appendix I.
SENS:CORR:COLL:ZERO
OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:CORR:COLL:ZERO?"
ENTER 722;A$

SENSe:CORRection[:LOSS[:INPut[:MAGNitude]]]
Syntax

SENSe[1j2]:CORRection''[:LOSS[:INPut[:MAGNitude]]]
[]

-200dB  value  +200dB
unit is DB

Remote Operation - Commands 8-11

8

Description

This command enters a calibration factor for the module.
The value is a oating point number (NRf). The units are
dB. dB are the units used if you do not specify units.

Related Commands
Example

SENS:CORR:LOSS:INP:MAGN?
OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:CORR:LOSS:INP:MAGN 10DB"

SENSe:CORRection[:LOSS[:INPut[:MAGNitude]]]?
Syntax
Response
Description
Related Commands
Example

SENSe[1j2]:CORRection''[:LOSS[:INPut[:MAGNitude]]]?



This command returns the calibration factor. The factor is
returned as a oating point number (NR3) in dB. No units
are returned in the response message.
SENS:CORR:LOSS:INP:MAGN
OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:CORR:LOSS:INP:MAGN?"
ENTER 722;A$

SENSe:POWer:ATIME
Syntax

Description

8

Related Commands
Example

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:ATIME'' []

20ms  value  3600s
unit is SjMS
This command sets the averaging time for the module.
The input power-level is read and averaged over this
period. You specify the averaging time as a oating point
number (NRf). Units can be attached, either seconds or
milliseconds can be speci ed. Seconds are the units used
if you do not specify units.
SENS:POW:ATIME?
OUTPUT 722;"SENS:POW:ATIME 200MS"

8-12 Remote Operation - Commands

SENSe:POWer:ATIME?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands
Example

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:ATIME?''



20ms  value  3600s
This command returns the setting for the averaging time
for the module. The averaging time is returned as a
number in exponential number (NR3). The returned
value is in seconds. No units are returned in the response
message.
SENS:POW:ATIME
OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:POW:ATIME?"
ENTER 722;A$

SENSe:POWer:RANGe:AUTO
Syntax
Description

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:RANGe:AUTO'' 

Related Commands

This command enables or disables automatic power
ranging for this module. That is whether the ranging is set
by the POW:RANG command, or whether it is automatically
determined by the instrument. You specify the ranging by
a boolean. OFF, or 0, disables automatic ranging. ON, or
any non-zero value, enables automatic ranging.
SENS:POW:RANG:UPPER , SENS:POW:RANG:UPPER? ,

Example

OUTPUT 722;"SENS1:POW:RANG:AUTO OFF"

SENS:POW:RANG:AUTO?

SENSe:POWer:RANGe:AUTO?
Syntax
Response
Description

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:RANGe:AUTO?''



This command returns whether automatic power ranging
is being used by the module. The ranging is returned
as either 0 or 1. 0 means that automatic ranging is not
selected. 1 means that automatic ranging is selected.
Remote Operation - Commands 8-13

8

Related Commands

SENS:POW:RANG:UPPER , SENS:POW:RANG:UPPER?,
SENS:POW:RANG:AUTO

Example

OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:POW:RANG:AUTO?"
ENTER 722;A$

SENSe:POWer:RANGe[:UPPER]
Syntax

Description

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:RANGe[:UPPER]''
[]

-110dBm < value < +30dBm. The actual limits depend on
the module you use, please refer to the speci cations for
you module in Appendix C.
unit is DBM
This command sets the power range for this module, that
is the full-scale value for the display. The range changes
at 10dBm intervals. The corresponding ranges for linear
measurements (measurements in Watts) are given in the
table below:

8

8-14 Remote Operation - Commands

Table 8-7.
Range Upper Linear
Power Limit
+30dBm
+20dBm
+10dBm
0dBm
-10dBm
-20dBm
-30dBm
-40dBm
-50dBm
-60dBm
-70dBm
-80dBm
-90dBm
-100dBm
-110dBm

1999.9mW
199.99mW
19.999mW
1999.9W
199.99W
19.999W
1999.9nW
199.99nW
19.999nW
1999.9pW
199.99pW
19.999pW
1.999pW
0.199pW
0.019pW

Related Commands

You specify the range as a oating point number (NRf).
This number is rounded to the closest multiple of ten,
because the range changes at 10dBm intervals. The units
(dBm) can be included in the command. dBm are the
units used if you do not specify units.
SENS:POW:RANG:UPPER?, SENS:POW:RANG:AUTO ,

Example

OUTPUT 722;"SENS1:POW:RANG:UPPER -20DBM"

SENS:POW:RANG:AUTO?

Remote Operation - Commands 8-15

8

SENSe:POWer:RANGe[:UPPER]?

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:RANGe[:UPPER]?''

Syntax
Response



Description

Related Commands
Example

-110dBm  value  +30dBm
This command returns the range setting for the module.
The range is returned as a signed integer (NR1). The
returned value is in dBm. No units are returned in the
response message.
SENS:POW:RANG:UPPER , SENS:POW:RANG:AUTO,
SENS:POW:RANG:AUTO?

OUTPUT 722;"SENS1:POW:RANG:UPPER?"
ENTER 722;A$

SENSe:POWer:REFerence
Syntax

Description

8

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:REFerence''
TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2,[]

0.001pW  value  +9999.9mW
-200dBm  value  +200dBm
with TOREF or 2
unit is PWjNWjUWjMWjWattjDBM
-200dB  value  +200dB
with TOA or TOB or 0 or 1
unit is DB
This command sets the reference level for this module.
There are two types of reference. One is where the power
being read by the module is expressed relative to this
absolute level:
Result(dB ) = Measured(dBm) 0 Reference(dBm)
Where the Measured value includes any calibration factor.
You select this by using TOREF (or 2) and the value for
the reference as a oating point number (NRf), with the

8-16 Remote Operation - Commands

units dBm or Watts. dBm are the units used if you do not
specify units.
The other type of reference is possible if you are using
two power sensors, one in each channel. Here the
quotient of the power readings for the two channels is
expressed relative to the reference level:
Result(dB ) =

Related Commands
Example

F irstChannelMeasured
(dB ) 0 Reference(dB )
SecondChannelMeasured

Where the Measured value includes any calibration factor.
You select this by using TOA (or 0) or TOB (or 1). You can
only use TOB (or 1) for channel A when there are two
sensor modules. You can only use TOA (or 0) for channel B
when there are two sensor modules. You enter the value
for the reference as a oating point number (NRf). You
can include the units (dB) in the command. dB are the
units used if you do not specify units.
SENS:POW:REF?, SENS:POW:REF:STATE ,
SENS:POW:REF:STATE? , SENS:POW:REF:STATE:RATI,
SENS:POW:REF:STAT:RATI?, SENS:POW:REF:DISP
OUTPUT 722;"SENS:POW:REF TOREF,10DBM"

SENSe:POWer:REFerence?
Syntax
Response

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:REFerence?''
TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2



0.001pW  value  +9999.9mW
-200dBm  value  +200dBm
with TOREFor 2
-200dB  value  +200dB
with TOB (or 1) or TOA (or 0)

Description

This command returns the reference level that is set for
the module. There are three possible references, you
Remote Operation - Commands 8-17

8

Related Commands

Example

select the reference you want by using one of TOA (or 0),
TOB (or 1) or TOREF (or 2). The reference is returned as a
oating point number in exponential number (NR3). The
returned value is in the selected absolute units (Watts
or dBm), if you speci ed TOREF (or 2), or in dB, if you
speci ed TOB (or 1) or TOA (or 0). No units are returned in
the response message.
SENS:POW:REF , SENS:POW:REF:STATE,
SENS:POW:REF:STATE? , SENS:POW:REF:STATE:RATI,
SENS:POW:REF:STAT:RATI?, SENS:POW:REF:DISP,
SENS:POW:UNIT , SENS:POW:UNIT?
OUTPUT 722;"SENS1:POW:REF? TOA"
ENTER 722;A$

SENSe:POWer:REFerence:DISPlay
Syntax
Description

8

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:REFerence:DISPlay''

This command sets the reference level for this module
from the input power-level. There are two types of
reference. One is where the power being read by the
module is expressed relative to this absolute level:
Result(dB ) = Measured(dBm) 0 Reference(dBm)
Where the Measured value includes any calibration factor.
You select this by using TOREFwith the
SENSe:POWer:REFerence command.
The other type of reference is possible if you are using
two power sensors, one in each channel. Here the
quotient of the power readings for the two channels is
expressed relative to the reference level:

Result(dB ) =

F irstChannelMeasured
(dB ) 0 Reference(dB )
SecondChannelMeasured

Where the Measured value includes any calibration factor.
You select this by using TOB or TOA with the
SENSe:POWer:REFerence command.

8-18 Remote Operation - Commands

Related Commands

SENS:POW:REF , SENS:POW:REF? , SENS:POW:REF:STATE ,
SENS:POW:REF:STATE? , SENS:POW:REF:STAT:RATI,
SENS:POW:REF:STAT:RATI?

Example

OUTPUT 722;"SENS:POW:REF TOREF"
OUTPUT 722;"SENS:POW:REF:DISP"

SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe
Syntax
Description

Related Commands
Example

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:REFerence:STATe'' 

This command sets whether the results are in relative
or absolute units. The reference state is speci ed by a
boolean. OFF, or 0, means that the result is absolute (that
is, in dBm or Watts). ON, or any non-zero value, means
that the result is relative to a reference level (that is, in
dB).
SENS:POW:REF , SENS:POW:REF? , SENS:POW:REF:STATE? ,
SENS:POW:REF:STATE:RATI, SENS:POW:REF:STAT:RATI?,
SENS:POW:REF:DISP, SENS:POW:UNIT, SENS:POW:UNIT?
OUTPUT 722;"SENS1:POW:REF:STATE ON"

SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands
Example

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:REFerence:STATe?''



This command returns whether the results are in relative
or absolute units. The ranging is returned as either 0 or 1.
0 means that the results are absolute (that is, in dBm or
Watts). 1 means that the result is relative to a reference
(that is, in dB).
SENS:POW:REF , SENS:POW:REF? , SENS:POW:REF:STATE ,
SENS:POW:REF:STATE:RATI, SENS:POW:REF:STAT:RATI?,
SENS:POW:REF:DISP, SENS:POW:UNIT, SENS:POW:UNIT?
OUTPUT 722;"SENS1:POW:REF:STAT?"
ENTER 722;A$

Remote Operation - Commands 8-19

8

SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe:RATIo
Syntax
Description

Related Commands

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:REFerence:STATe:RATIo''
TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2

This command selects the reference with respect to which
the results for this module are given. That is whether
the results are displayed relative to channel A TOA (or 0),
relative to channel B TOB (or 1), or relative to an absolute
reference TOREF (or 2). TOB (or 1) is only possible for
channel A of an instrument that has a sensor in each
channel. TOA (or 0) is only possible for channel B of an
instrument that has a sensor in each channel.
SENS:POW:REF , SENS:POW:REF?, SENS:POW:REF:STATE,
SENS:POW:REF:STATE? , SENS:POW:REF:STAT:RATI?,
SENS:POW:REF:DISP

Example

OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:POW:REF:STAT:RATI TOB"

SENSe:POWer:REFerence:STATe:RATIo?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:REFerence:STATe:RATIo?''

0j 1j 2

This command returns the reference setting for the
module. The ranging is returned as one of 0, 1, or 2.
0 is returned if channel A is being used as a reference
for channel B.1 is returned if channel B is being used as
a reference for channel A. 2 is returned if an absolute
reference is being used.
SENS:POW:REF , SENS:POW:REF?, SENS:POW:REF:STATE,
SENS:POW:REF:STATE? , SENS:POW:REF:STAT:RATI,
SENS:POW:REF:DISP

8

Example

OUTPUT 722;"SENS1:POW:REF:STAT:RATI?"
ENTER 722;A$

8-20 Remote Operation - Commands

SENSe:POWer:UNIT
Syntax

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:UNIT'' 

Related Commands

unit is DBMjWattj0j1
This command sets the units in use when an absolute
reading is made. This can be dBm (DBMj0) or Watts
(Wattj1).
SENS:POW:UNIT?, SENS:POW:REF:STATE ,

Example

OUTPUT 722;"SENS1:POW:UNIT W"

Description

SENS:POW:REF:STATE?

SENSe:POWer:UNIT?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands
Example

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:UNIT?''



This command returns the units selected for absolute
readings. 0 means that dBm is being used as the absolute
units. 1 means that Watts are being used as the absolute
units.
SENS:POW:UNIT, SENS:POW:REF:STATE ,
SENS:POW:REF:STATE?

OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:POW:UNIT?"
ENTER 722;A$

SENSe:POWer:WAVElength
Syntax

Description

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:WAVElength'' []

450nm  value  1700nm. The actual limits depend on
the module you use, please refer to the speci cations for
you module in Appendix C.
unit is NMjUMjM
This command sets the wavelength for this module. You
specify the wavelength as a oating point number (NRf).
The units can be nanometers, micrometers or meters.
Meters are the units used if you do not specify units.

Remote Operation - Commands 8-21

8

Related Commands
Example

SENS:POW:WAVE?
OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:POW:WAVE 1300NM"

SENSe:POWer:WAVElength?

SENSe[1j2]:POWer:WAVElength?''

Syntax
Response



450nm  value  1020nm
This command returns the wavelength setting for the
module. The result is returned as a oating point number
in exponential number (NR3). The returned value is in
meters. No units are returned in the response message.

Description

Related Commands
Example

SENS:POW:WAVE
OUTPUT 722;"SENS2:POW:WAVE?"
ENTER 722;A$

SOURce Commands

Any function that is related to source modules is included with the source
commands.

Table 8-8. SOURce Command Summary
Command
Parameter
SOURce[1j2]
8

:AM
[:INTernal]
:FREQuency]
:FREQuency?
:POWer
:ATTenuation[1j2]
:ATTenuation[1j2]?
:STATe
:STATe?
:WAVElength
:WAVElength?

8-22 Remote Operation - Commands

[]jCW
[]

UPPerjLOWerjBOTH

Specifying the Channel

You specify the channel by attaching a numeric sux to the SOURce mnemonic.
You access channel A by using SOURce1, or channel B by using SOURce2. If you
do not add a sux to the mnemonic, channel A is assumed.

SOURce:AM[:INTernal]:FREQuency
Syntax

Description

Related Commands
Example

SOURce[1j2]:AM[:INTernal]:FREQuency''
[]jCW

value = 0Hzj270Hzj1kHzj2kHz
unit is HZjKHZ
This command sets the frequency of the amplitude
modulation of the source output signal. You specify the
frequency as a oating point number (NRf). Units can
be attached, one of Hz, or kHz can be speci ed. Hertz
are the units used if you do not specify units. CW results
in a continuous wave being output, this is equivalent to
specifying 0Hz.
SOUR:AM[:INTernal]:FREQ?
OUTPUT 722;"SOUR:AM[:INTernal]:FREQ 10KHZ"

SOURce:AM[:INTernal]:FREQuency?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands
Example

SOURce[1j2]:AM[:INTernal]:FREQuency?''



value = 0Hzj270Hzj1kHzj2kHz
This command returns the setting for the frequency of
modulation of the output of the source module. The
frequency is returned as a number in exponential format.
The returned value is in Hertz. A returned value of 0Hz
means that continuous wave is selected. No units are
returned in the response message.
SOUR:AM[:INTernal]:FREQ
OUTPUT 722;"SOURc2:AM[:INTernal]:FREQ?"
ENTER 722;A$
Remote Operation - Commands 8-23

8

SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation
Syntax

Description

Related Commands
Example

SOURce[1j2]:POWer:ATTenuation''[1j2]
[]

0  value  6.0
unit is DB
This command sets the attenuation of the source output
signal. You specify the attenuation as a oating point
number. Units can be attached. dB are the units used if
you do not specify units. SOUR:POW:ATT2 is used with the
higher wavelength of a dual wavelength source.
SOUR:POW:ATT?
OUTPUT 722;"SOUR:POW:ATT 1.0DB"

SOURce:POWer:ATTenuation?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands
Example

8

SOURce[1j2]:POWer:ATTenuation''[1j2]?



0  value  6.0
This command returns the setting for the attenuation
of the output of the source module. The attenuation
is returned as a number in exponential format. The
returned value is in dB. No units are returned in the
response message.
SOUR:POW:ATT
OUTPUT 722;"SOURc2:POW:ATT1?"
ENTER 722;A$

SOURce:POWer:STATe
Syntax
Description
Related Commands

SOURce[1j2]:POWer:STATe'' 

This command sets the state of the source output signal.
You specify the state as a boolean. OFF, or 0, disables the
source. ON, or any non-zero number, enables the source.
SOUR:POW:STAT?

8-24 Remote Operation - Commands

Example

OUTPUT 722;"SOUR:POW:STAT OFF"

SOURce:POWer:STATe?

SOURce[1j2]:POWer:STATe?''

Syntax
Response
Description



This command returns the current setting for the state of
the source. 0 means that the source is disabled. 1 means
that the source is enabled.

Related Commands
Example

SOUR:POW:STAT
OUTPUT 722;"SOURc2:POW:STAT?"
ENTER 722;A$

SOURce:POWer:WAVElength
Note

This command only works with dual wavelength sources.

Syntax
Description

Related Commands
Example

SOURce[1j2]:POWer:WAVElength''
UPPerjLOWerjBOTH

This command sets the wavelength of the output signal.
You specify the choice as UPPer for the longer of the
two wavelengths, LOWer for the shorter of the two
wavelengths, or BOTH if the two wavelengths are to be
enabled together.
SOUR:POW:WAVE?
OUTPUT 722;"SOUR:POW:WAVE UPP"

Remote Operation - Commands 8-25

8

SOURce:POWer:WAVElength?
Syntax
Response
Description

SOURce[1j2]:POWer:WAVElength?''



The value is the actual wavelength of the source. This
depends on the module being used.
This command returns the setting for the wavelength
of the output of the source module. The frequency
is returned as a number in exponential format. The
returned value is in meters. No units are returned in the
response message. When both wavelengths of a dual
wavelength source have been enabled, the query returns
0

Related Commands
Example

SOUR:POW:WAVE
OUTPUT 722;"SOUR2:POW:WAVE?"
ENTER 722;A$

SYSTem Commands

Any function that is not speci cally related to instrument performance is
included with the mainframe system commands.

Command

8

Table 8-9. SYSTem Command Summary
Parameter
Note

SYSTem
:DATE
,,
2 char. each/4 char. for year
:DATE?
:ERRor?
Query only
:TIME
,,
2 char. each
:TIME?

8-26 Remote Operation - Commands

SYSTem:DATE
Syntax

Description

Related Commands
Example

SYSTem:DATE ,,

1990  year  2089
1  month  12
1  day  31
This command sets the date on the internal clock in the
instrument. You enter the date as three integers separated
by commas.
The date is not a ected by normal reset conditions (*RST,
power-o , and so on).
SYST:DATE?, SYST:TIME, SYST:TIME?
OUTPUT 722;"SYST:DATE 1990,1,17"

SYSTem:DATE?
Syntax
Response

Description
Related Commands
Example

SYSTem:DATE?

  

1990  year  2089
1  month  12
1  day  31
This command returns the date from the internal clock in
the instrument. The date is returned as three integers
(NR1).
SYST:DATE, SYST:TIME, SYST:TIME?
OUTPUT 722;"SYST:DATE?"
ENTER 722;A$

SYSTem:ERRor?
Syntax
Response

8
SYSTem:ERRor?

 

-32768  value  +32767
For the HP 8153A the string is always empty (\").
Remote Operation - Commands 8-27

Description

This command returns an error code. The error queue
is organized as a First-In, First-Out (FIFO) queue. This
means that it is always the oldest error in the queue that
is returned. Only one error is returned per query.
A list of the errors and the error codes is given in
Appendix I.
A returned error code of 0 means that there are no errors.

Example

OUTPUT 722;"SYST:ERR?"
ENTER 722; A$

SYSTem:TIME
Syntax

Description

8

Related Commands
Example

SYSTem:TIME ,,

0  hour  23
0  minute  59
0  second  60
This command sets the time on the internal clock in
the instrument. You enter the time as three integers,
separated by commas. Note that the seconds can be set to
a value in the range 0 to 60. When you set the seconds
to 60, the actual value for the seconds is zero but the
minutes are incremented. The hours, day, month and year
may also be incremented. For example, if you set the time
by the command SYST:TIME 23,59,60 the time is set to
midnight and the day is incremented. The time is set to
the new value immediately when the message has been
parsed.
The time is not a ected by reset conditions (*RST,
power-o , and so on).
SYST:DATE, SYST:DATE, SYST:TIME?
OUTPUT 722;"SYST:TIME 9,15,0"

8-28 Remote Operation - Commands

SYSTem:TIME?
Syntax
Response

SYSTem:TIME?

Description

This command returns the time from the internal clock in
the instrument. The time is returned as three integers
(NR1).
SYST:DATE, SYST:DATE?, SYST:TIME

Related Commands
Example

  

0  hour  23
0  minute  59
0  second  59

OUTPUT 722;"SYST:TIME?"
ENTER 722;A$

8

Remote Operation - Commands 8-29

9
HP-IB Application Commands
This chapter gives a list of the HP 8153A HP-IB commands for running
applications remotely.
The commands are grouped according to the modules to which they refer. A
list of the commands for a module are supplied with that module. Install the
relevant pages into this chapter each time you add a module to your system.

Program Commands

All the applications are run using the PROGram commands.
The applications do not automatically enable local lockout. It is possible for
someone to disturb an application that is under remote control by using the
front panel keys. To avoid this, you can activate the local lockout.
It is possible to disturb an application by sending programming commands to
the channel in which the application is running. Use the status commands to
check that the application has nished before sending any more commands to
the channel.

9
Remote Operation - Application Commands 9-1

Table 9-1. PROGram Command Summary
Command
Parameter
Note
PROGram[1j2]
:[:SELected]
:EXECute
:NAME
:NAME?
:NUMBer
:NUMBer?
:STATe
:STATe?


,

CONTinuejPAUSejRUNjSTOPj0j1j2j3

You specify the channel by attaching a numeric sux to the PROGram mnemonic.
You access channel A by using PROGram1, and channel B by using PROGram2. If
you do not add a sux to the mnemonic, channel A is assumed.

PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute
Syntax
Description
Related Commands
Example

PROGram[1j2]:[:SELected]:EXECute''

This command runs the selected application.
PROG:SEL:NAME
OUTPUT 722;"PROG:SEL:EXEC"

PROGram[:SELected]:NAME
Syntax
Description

9

Related Commands
Example

PROGram[1j2]:[:SELected]:NAME'' 

The possible values for application depend on the modules
installed. For the mainframe:
This command selects an application. All further PROGram
commands apply only to the selected application.
The default (for example, after a *RST) is for PROG to be
selected. PROG is not an application and cannot be run.
PROG:SEL:NAME?
OUTPUT 722;"PROG:SEL:NAME LOGGING"

9-2 Remote Operation - Application Commands

PROGram[:SELected]:NAME?
Syntax
Response
Description

PROGram[1j2]:[:SELected]:NAME?''

Related Commands
Example

PROG:SEL:NAME



This command returns the name of the selected
application.
If no application has been selected, NO APPL is returned.
OUTPUT 722;"PROG:SEL:NAME?"
ENTER 722;A$

PROGram[:SELected]:NUMBer
Syntax

Description
Related Commands
Example

PROGram[1j2]:[:SELected]:NUMBer''
,

The possible values for varname and value depend on the
selected application.
This command sets the parameters for an application. The
parameters that you can use with this command depend
on the selected application.
PROG:SEL:NUMBer?, PROG:SEL:NAME
OUTPUT 722;"PROG:SEL:NUMBer SAMPLES,100"

PROGram[:SELected]:NUMBer?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands

PROGram[1j2]:[:SELected]:NUMBer?'' 

 The values returned depend on the selected

application.
This command returns the results from the application
most recently run by the PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute
command. It cannot be used to read out results
immediately after a power up (that is, before an
application has been run), or to read the results of an
application run under local control.
PROG:SEL:NUMB, PROG:SEL:NAME
Remote Operation - Application Commands 9-3

9

Example

OUTPUT 722;"PROG:SEL:NUMB? ASAMPLES"
ENTER 722;A$

PROGram[:SELected]:STATe
Syntax
Description

Related Commands
Example

PROGram[1j2]:[:SELected]:STATe''
CONTinuejPAUSejRUNjSTOPj0j1j2j3

This command sets the state for an application. RUN (or 2)
runs the application, this is equivalent to PROG:SEL:EXEC .
PAUSe (or1) pauses the application. STOP (or 3) stops the
application. CONTinue (or 0) restarts the application after
a PAUSe.
PROG:SEL:STATe?, PROG:SEL:NAME
OUTPUT 722;"PROG:SEL:STATe RUN"

PROGram[:SELected]:STATe?
Syntax
Response
Description

Related Commands
Example

PROGram[1j2]:[:SELected]:STATe?''
0j 1j 2j 3

This command returns state of the selected application. 0
means that the application is continuing (after a pause).
1 means that the application is paused. 2 means that an
application is running. 3 means that an application is
stopped.
PROG:SEL:STAT , PROG:SEL:NAME
OUTPUT 722;"PROG:SEL:STAT?"
ENTER 722;A$

9
9-4 Remote Operation - Application Commands

Mainframe Applications

These are applications that are supplied with the software of the mainframe.
For more complete explanation of the application, refer to Chapter 3

The Logging Application
application

Note
Parameters

LOGGING

This application only runs on an instrument with a sensor
module.
varname = SAMPLES, this is the number of samples to
be taken.
1  value  500
The total time for the logging application consists of the
averaging time and the time to process the sample. That
is, a sample is only taken after the previous sample has
been taken and processed.
The processing time depends on a number of factors
including the system con guration. If any applications
or measurements are running in the other channel, the
processing time between samples may vary.
On printer or plotter outputs, the total time given for
the logging application includes both the averaging and
the processing time.
varname = LOGGSTART, this is the starting condition.
value = 1j2j3 where
1
means start when the input power-level is above
threshold.
2
means start when the input power-level is below
threshold.
3
means start immediately.
Remote Operation - Application Commands 9-5

9

varname = THRESHOLD, this is the threshold level for
starting. It is only applicable when LOGGSTART is set to
1 or 2.

Note

Results

Do not specify units for this parameter

-400  value  400
The value for the threshold level is in dBm.
The other parameters (such as Tavg and wavelength) must
be set with a SENSe command.
varname = ASAMPLES, the number of samples taken.
varname = RESULT, the logged values. This is returned
as a string of values separated by commas (,), or as an
array of values, depending on the controlling program.

The Stability Application
application

Note
Parameters

9

STABILITY

This application only runs on an instrument with a sensor
module.
varname = T_TOTAL, this is the total time for which
the application is to be run. The di erence of the
actual total time from T_TOTAL depends on a number of
factors including the system con guration. The worst
case timing di erence is 30s/h.
0  value  359,999
value is the total time in seconds.
The other parameters (such as Tavg and wavelength) must
be set with a SENSe command.

Results
9-6 Remote Operation - Application Commands

varname = ASAMPLES, the number of samples taken.
varname = RESULT, the stability values. This is
returned as a string of values separated by commas (,),
or as an array of values, depending on the controlling
program.

9
Remote Operation - Application Commands 9-7

10

10
HP-IB Programming Examples
This chapter gives some programming examples. The language used for
programming is BASIC 4.0 Language System used on HP 9000 Series 200/300
computers.
These programming examples do not cover the full command set for the
instrument. They are intended only as an introduction to the method of
programming the instrument and the principles behind TMSL.

Remote Operation - Programming Examples 10-1

10

Example 1
Function

This program displays the time from the real time clock on the HP 8153A.

Listing
10
20
30
40
50
60
65
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
135
140
150

ON KBD GOTO Exit
INTEGER Hour, Min, Sec
Pmm=722
GINIT
CSIZE 14
GRAPHICS ON
!
LOOP
OUTPUT Pmm;"syst:time?"
ENTER Pmm; Hour, Min, Sec
GCLEAR
MOVE 30,50
LABEL USING "ZZ,A,ZZ,A,ZZ";Hour;":";Min;":";Sec
END LOOP
!
Exit: GRAPHICS OFF
END

Description
Line No.

10
20
30
40 to 60
70
80 to 90
100 to 120
130
140 to 150

Execution goes to Exit when a key on the keyboard is hit.
Declaration of variables.
Setting the address of the instrument (Address = 22).
Initializes the screen
Start of the main loop in the program.
Input the system time from the HP 8153A.
Display the time.
Loop to 70
Restore the screen and end the execution of the program.

10-2 Remote Operation - Programming Examples

10
Example 2

Example 2

For this program to work, you need a sensor module in channel A.

Function

This program reads in values from the HP 8153A, and counts the number that
are read twice in succession.

Listing
10
20
30
40
50
60
65
70
80
90
95
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
175
180

INTEGER Dcount
REAL Value1,Value2
Dcount=0
Value1=-1000
Pmm=722
CLEAR SCREEN
!
OUTPUT Pmm;"*sre 0;*ese 0"
OUTPUT Pmm;"*cls"
OUTPUT Pmm;"sens1:pow:unit w;rang:auto on"
!
LOOP
OUTPUT Pmm;"read1:pow?"
ENTER Pmm;Value2
IF Value2=Value1 THEN Dcount=Dcount+1
Value1=Value2
PRINT TABXY(10,10);"Measurement Value : ";Value2
PRINT TABXY(10,11);"Double Read Values : ";Dcount
END LOOP
!
END

Description
Line No.
10 to 60
70
80
90

Declarations and initializations.
Disable common status interrupts.
Clear the status
Set the sensor units to Watts and make sure that automatic
ranging is in operation. Note the use of the semicolon so that
we do not need to repeat the sens1:pow part of the command.
Remote Operation - Programming Examples 10-3

10
Example 2
110 to 120
130
140
140 to 150

Take a reading from the sensor. The read1:pow instruction does
not need a separate triggering command.
Check to see if the new reading is the same as the last one. If it
is, increment the count of double readings.
Store the new reading for the next time round.
Display the current reading, and the number of double readings.

10-4 Remote Operation - Programming Examples

10
Example 3

Example 3

For this program to work, you need a sensor module in channel A.

Function

This program reads in values from the HP 8153A, and counts the number that
are read twice in succession. The di erence between this and the program
given in example 2, is that this program uses a command that needs a separate
triggering command.

Listing
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
215
220

INTEGER Dcount, Vcount
REAL Value1,Value2
Dcount=0
Vcount=0
Value1=-1000
Pmm=722
CLEAR SCREEN
!
OUTPUT Pmm;"*sre 0;*ese 0"
OUTPUT Pmm;"*cls"
OUTPUT Pmm;"sens1:pow:unit w;rang:auto on"
OUTPUT Pmm;"init1:cont on"
!
LOOP
OUTPUT Pmm;"fetch1:pow?"
ENTER Pmm;Value2
IF Value2=Value1 THEN Dcount=Dcount+1
Value1=Value2
Vcount=Vcount+1
PRINT TABXY(10,10);"Measurement Value : ";Value2
PRINT TABXY(10,11);"Number Of Values
: ";Vcount
PRINT TABXY(10,11);"Double Read Values : ";Dcount
END LOOP
!
END

Remote Operation - Programming Examples 10-5

10
Example 3

Description
Line No.
10 to 70
80
90
100

110
130 to 140
150 to 200

Declarations and initializations.
Disable common status interrupts.
Clear the status.
Set the sensor units to Watts and make sure that automatic
ranging is in operation.
Switch on continuous triggering.
Take a reading from the sensor using fetch1:pow. The
triggering for this command is provided by the continuous
trigger.
Check to see if the new reading is the same as the last one. If
it is, increment the count of double readings. Store the new
reading for the next time round. Display the current reading,
the total number of readings, and the number of double
readings.

10-6 Remote Operation - Programming Examples

10
Example 4

Example 4

For this program to work, you need a sensor module in channel A or channel B.

Function

This program counts the number of times the power reading goes into
overrange.
When this program is running, put the instrument under local operation (use
4Local5, make sure that RMT is o ). Set the range to the lowest manual range.
Apply an optical signal to the sensor, and switch this signal on and o to
generate an overload.
NNNNNNNNNNN

Listing
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
65
70
80
90
100
110
115
120
130
140
150
160
170
175
180
190
195
200
210
220
225
230
235

ASSIGN @Pmm TO 722
!
OUTPUT @Pmm;"*cls"
OUTPUT @Pmm;"stat:ques:pow:overr:ptr 3;ntr 0;enab 3"
OUTPUT @Pmm;"stat:ques:pow:ptr 1;ntr 0;enab 1"
OUTPUT @Pmm;"stat:ques:ptr 8;ntr 0;enab 8"
OUTPUT @Pmm;"*sre 8"
!
REPEAT
OUTPUT @Pmm;"syst:err?"
ENTER @Pmm;Err
IF Err<>0 THEN PRINT "Error Code = ";Err
UNTIL Err=0
!
CLEAR SCREEN
PRINT TABXY(20,10);"Waiting for HPIB-Interrupt in an endless loop."
PRINT TABXY(20,11);"If an Overrange occurs, a counter will be"
PRINT TABXY(20,12);"incremented."
PRINT TABXY(20,14);"Overrange Count : ";
PRINT TABXY(20,15);"Serial Poll
: ";
!
ON INTR 7 GOSUB Pmm_srq
ENABLE INTR 7;2
!
Ende = 0
REPEAT
UNTIL Ende=200
!
GOTO 320
!

Remote Operation - Programming Examples 10-7

10
Example 4
240 Pmm_srq: Value=SPOLL(@Pmm)
250
Ende=Ende+1
260
PRINT TABXY(38,14);Ende
270
PRINT TABXY(38,15);Value
275
!
280
OUTPUT @Pmm;"*cls"
290
LOCAL @Pmm
300
ENABLE INTR 7
310
RETURN
315 !
320 END

Description
Line No.

20
30

40
50
60
70 to 100
120 to 170
180 to 190

Clear the status
Set up the transition lters, and the enable register for the
QUEStionable:POWer:OVERRange node. An overrange for
channel A is signalled in bit 0 of this node, an overrange for
channel B is signalled in bit 1. We enable both bits 0 and 1 for
positive transitions, that is, if either of these two bits goes from
0 to 1 in the condition register, the corresponding bit is set in
the event register. Negative transitions are ignored. The enable
register is set for both bits 0 and 1, so that if either are set,
they set the summary bit in the QUEStionable:POWer node.
Set up the transition lters, and the enable register for the
QUEStionable:POWer node. Bit 0 is set up here, this is the
summary bit for the QUEStionable:POWer:OVERRange node.
Set up the transition lters, and the enable register for the
QUEStionable node. Bit 3 is set up here, this is the summary bit
for the QUEStionable:POWer node.
Set up the Status Request Enable register. This causes an
interrupt when the bit re ecting the QUEStionable node is set.
Clear the error queue, by reading out all the error messages.
This command makes sure that the initialization commands
(lines 30-60) have run.
Set up the display.
Set up the interrupt service routine and enable the interrupt.

10-8 Remote Operation - Programming Examples

10
Example 4
200 to 220
240 to 310
240
250
260 to 270
280
290
300

A loop for the program while waiting for the interrupt.
The interrupt service routine.
Perform a serial poll.
Increment the overrange count.
Display the results.
Make sure that the status is cleared.
Make sure that the instrument is in local operation.
Enable the interrupt again.

Remote Operation - Programming Examples 10-9

10

Example 5
Function

This program lets you output commands to the instrument. The response for
the command, and the current contents of the Status Byte and Standard Event
Status registers are displayed.

Listing
10
20
30
40
50
55
60
65
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
255
260
270
275
280
290
300
310
320

INTEGER Value,B,Quot,Xpos,Ypos
DIM Inp$[100]
DIM A$[300]
ASSIGN @Pmm TO 722
ON INTR 7 GOSUB Pmm_srq
!
OUTPUT @Pmm;"*sre 48;*ese 255"
!
CLEAR SCREEN
PRINT TABXY(40,3);"Status Byte"
PRINT TABXY(4,1);"
SRQ ESB MAV"
PRINT TABXY(4,2);" +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+"
PRINT TABXY(4,3);" | |
| | |
| |
| |"
PRINT TABXY(4,4);" +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+"
PRINT TABXY(4,5);"
^"
PRINT TABXY(4,6);"
|"
PRINT TABXY(4,7);" +-------------------------------+"
PRINT TABXY(4,8);" |
OR
|"
PRINT TABXY(4,9);" +-------------------------------+"
PRINT TABXY(4,10);"
^ ^ ^
^ ^
^ ^
^"
PRINT TABXY(4,11);" +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+"
PRINT TABXY(4,12);" |
| |
| |
| | |
|"
PRINT TABXY(4,13);" +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+"
PRINT TABXY(4,14);" PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC"
PRINT TABXY(40,12);"Standard Event Status Register"
PRINT TABXY(4,17);"Last Error
:"
PRINT TABXY(4,18);"Output Queue :"
!
Ende=0
ENABLE INTR 7;2
!
REPEAT
INPUT "Command ? ",Inp$
OUTPUT @Pmm;Inp$
WAIT 1.0
UNTIL Ende=1

10-10 Remote Operation - Programming Examples

10
Example 5
330
335
340
345
350
355
360
370
380
385
390
400
410
420
430
435
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
505
510
520
530
540
550
560
565
570
580
590
595
600
605
610
620
630
640
650
655
660
670
680
685
690

GOTO 690
!
Pmm_srq: Value=SPOLL(@Pmm)
!
Ypos=3
!
FOR Z=0 TO 1
B=128
Xpos=7
!
REPEAT
Quot=Value DIV B
IF Quot>0 THEN
PRINT TABXY(Xpos,Ypos);"1"
Value=Value-B
!
IF Z=0 THEN
IF B=16 THEN
ENTER @Pmm;A$
PRINT TABXY(21,18);"
PRINT TABXY(21,18);A$
END IF
END IF
!
ELSE
PRINT TABXY(Xpos,Ypos);"0"
END IF
B=B DIV 2
Xpos=Xpos+4
UNTIL B=0
!
OUTPUT @Pmm;"*esr?"
ENTER @Pmm;Value
Ypos=12
!
NEXT Z
!
REPEAT
OUTPUT @Pmm;"syst:err?"
ENTER @Pmm;Value
IF VALUE<>0 THEN PRINT TABXY(21,17);Value
UNTIL Value=0
!
OUTPUT @Pmm;"*cls"
ENABLE INTR 7
RETURN
!
END

"

Remote Operation - Programming Examples 10-11

10
Example 5

Description
Line No.

10 to 50
60
70 to 250
260
270
280 to 330
340 to 680
340
390 to 560
410 to 500
420 to 430
440 to 500
520
530 to 550
570 to 590
610 to 650
660 to 670

Declarations and Initializations.
Set up the status enable registers.
Set up the display.
Set up for the main program loop.
Enable the interrupt.
The main program loop, take in a command and send it to the
instrument.
The interrupt service routine.
Make a serial poll to get the contents of the Status Byte.
Look at each bit of the register.
This part looks after a bit if it is set.
Display the set bit.
Check to see if it is the MAV bit, and if it is, get the contents of
the output queue and display them.
Display the bit if it is not set.
Set up for the next bit.
Read the Standard Event Status register and set up to display
its contents.
Read a value from the error queue and display it, until the
queue is empty.
Clear the status and enable the interrupt again.

10-12 Remote Operation - Programming Examples

10
Example 6

Example 6
Function

This program runs the stability application, and at the end outputs the results to
the screen of the controller.

Listing
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390

ON KBD GOTO Exit
ON INTR 7 GOSUB Pmm_srq
!
INTEGER Appl_ready,Asamples
INTEGER T_total
REAL F(499)
!
T_total=30
Pmm=722
!
OUTPUT Pmm;"*rst;*cls;*sre 128"
OUTPUT Pmm;"stat:pres"
OUTPUT Pmm;"stat:oper:enab #H4000"
OUTPUT Pmm;"sens1:pow:atime 1s;unit dbm"
OUTPUT Pmm;"prog1:name stability"
OUTPUT Pmm;"prog1:numb t_total,";T_total
!
Appl_ready=0
OUTPUT Pmm;"prog1:exec"
ENABLE INTR 7;2
!
REPEAT
UNTIL Appl_ready=1
!
BEEP
!
OUTPUT Pmm;"prog1:numb? asamples"
ENTER Pmm;Asamples
REDIM F(Asamples-1)
!
OUTPUT Pmm;"prog1:numb? result"
ENTER Pmm;F(*)
!
FOR I=0 TO Asamples-1
PRINT F(I)
NEXT I
!
WAIT 5.0

Remote Operation - Programming Examples 10-13

10
Example 6
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470

GOTO Exit
!
Pmm_srq: Appl_ready=1
OUTPUT Pmm;"*cls"
ENABLE INTR 7
RETURN
!
Exit: END

Description
Line No.

20

110
120, 130
140
150
160
190
200
220, 230
280, 290
320, 330
350 to 370
420

Sets up where the program goes on the receipt of an interrupt
from the HP-IB.
Reset and clear the instrument, then enable the interrupt from
the Master Summary Status bit.
Enable the interrupt from the OPERation:PROGram node.
Set the acquisition time and the units for the results.
Select the application.
Set the parameter.
Run the application.
Enable the interrupt.
Put the program into a loop. The exit condition for this loop is
ful lled in the interrupt service subroutine.
Read in the number of samples that were taken.
Read in the samples.
Output the sample values to the screen.
Set the exit condition for the program loop.

10-14 Remote Operation - Programming Examples

10
Example 7

Example 7
Function

This program measures the minimum and maximum of an incoming signal.

Listing
10
20
25
30
40
45
50
60
70
80
85
90
100
110
120
130
140
145
150
160
170
180
185
190
200
210
220
225
230

ON KBD GOTO Theend
Pmm=722
!
OUTPUT Pmm;"*RST,*CLS"
OUTPUT Pmm;"INIT1:CONT ON"
!
OUTPUT Pmm;"READ1:POW?"
OUTPUT Pmm;A
GOSUB Minmeas
GOSUB Maxmeas
!
LOOP
OUTPUT Pmm;"READ1:POW?"
ENTER Pmm;A
IF AMaximum THEN GOSUB Maxmeas
END LOOP
!
Minmeas: Minimum=A
PRINT TABXY(4,12);"Minimum:
PRINT TABXY(13,12);Minimum
RETURN
!
Maxmeas: Maximum=A
PRINT TABXY(4,14);"Maximum:
PRINT TABXY(13,14);Maximum
RETURN
!
Theend: END

"

"

Remote Operation - Programming Examples 10-15

10
Example 7

Description
Line No.
10
20
30 to 40
50 to 80

90 to 140
150 to 180
190 to 220
230

Execution goes to Exit when a key on the keyboard is hit.
Setting the address of the instrument (Address = 22).
Initializes the multimeter
Input a rst reading into the variables for the minimum and
maximum.
The main loop, where the current power is read in and
compared with the minimum and maximum so far.
Set and display the new minimum value.
Set and display the new maximum value.
End the execution of the program.

10-16 Remote Operation - Programming Examples

A
Installation
This appendix provides installation instructions for the HP 8153A. It also
includes information about initial inspection and damage claims, preparation for
use, packaging, storage, and shipment.

Safety Considerations

The Model HP 8153A is a Class 1 instrument (that is, an instrument with an
exposed metal chassis directly connected to earth via the power supply cable).
The symbol used to show a protective earth terminal in the instrument is
.
Before operation, you should review the instrument and manual, including the
red safety page, for safety markings and instructions. You must follow these to
ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in safe condition.
Some HP 8153A circuits are powered whenever the instrument is connected to
the AC power source. To disconnect from the line power, disconnect the power
cord either at the rear power-inlet or at the AC line-power source (receptacle).
One of these must always be accessible. If the instrument is in a cabinet, it must
be disconnected from the line power by the system's line-power switch.

Installation A-1

A

A

Initial Inspection

Inspect the shipping container for damage. If there is damage to the container
or cushioning, you should keep them until you have checked the contents of the
shipment for completeness and veri ed the instrument both mechanically and
electrically.
The Performance Tests give procedures for checking the operation of the
instrument. If the contents are incomplete, mechanical damage or defect is
apparent, or if an instrument does not pass the operator's checks, notify the
nearest Hewlett-Packard oce.

Warning

To avoid hazardous electrical shock, do not perform
electrical tests when there are signs of shipping damage to
any portion of the outer enclosure (covers, panels, etc.).

Line Power Requirements

The HP 8153A can operate from any single-phase AC power source that supplies
between 100V and 240V at a frequency in the range from 50 to 60Hz. The
maximum power consumption is 55VA with all options installed.

The fuse used by this instrument is T1A / 250V (slow) (HP Part No. 2110-0007).
Changing the fuse should be carried out only by a quali ed electrician or by HP
service personnel as it is necessary to open the instrument.

Line Power Cable

In accordance with international safety standards, this instrument has
a three-wire power cable. When connected to an appropriate AC power
receptacle, this cable earths the instrument cabinet. The type of power cable
shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination. Refer to
Figure A-1 for the part numbers of the power cables available.

A-2 Installation

Warning

To avoid the possibility of injury or death, you must
observe the following precautions before switching on the
instrument.
If this instrument is to be energized via an
autotransformer for voltage reduction, ensure that the
Common terminal connects to the earthed pole of the
power source.
Insert the power cable plug only into a socket outlet
provided with a protective earth contact. Do not negate
this protective action by the using an extension cord
without a protective conductor.
Before switching on the instrument, the protective
earth terminal of the instrument must be connected to a
protective conductor. You can do this by using the power
cord supplied with the instrument.
It is prohibited to interrupt the protective earth
connection intentionally.

Installation A-3

A

A

Figure A-1. Line Power Cables - Plug Identi cation
The following work should be carried out by a quali ed electrician, and all local
electrical codes must be strictly observed. If the plug on the cable does not t
the power outlet, or if the cable is to be attached to a terminal block, cut the
cable at the plug end and rewire it.
The color coding used in the cable depends on the cable supplied. If you are
connecting a new plug, it should meet the local safety requirements and include
the following features:
Adequate load-carrying capacity (see table of speci cations).
Ground connection.
Cable clamp.

Operating Environment

The following summarizes the HP 8153A operating environment ranges. In order
for the HP 8153A to meet speci cations, the operating environment must be
within these limits.

Warning

A-4 Installation

The HP 8153A is not designed for outdoor use. To prevent
potential re or shock hazard, do not expose the HP 8153A
to rain or other excessive moisture.

Temperature

A

The HP 8153A may be operated in temperatures from 0 C to 55 C.

Humidity

The HP 8153A may be operated in environments with humidity up to 95%
(0 C to +40 C). The HP 8153A should be protected from temperatures or
temperature changes that cause condensation within the instrument.

Instrument Cooling

The HP 8153A has a cooling fan mounted internally. Mount or position the
instrument so that air can circulate through it freely. When operating the HP
8153A, choose a location that provides at least 75mm (3inches) of clearance at
the rear, and at least 25mm (1inch) of clearance at each side. Failure to provide
adequate air clearance may result in excessive internal temperature, reducing
instrument reliability.

Input/Output Signals
Caution

A maximum of 15V can be applied as an external voltage to any
of the BNC connectors.

HP-IB Interface

You can connect your HP-IB interface into a star network, a linear network, or a
combination star and linear network. The limitations imposed on this network
are as follows:
The total cable length cannot exceed 20 meters
The maximum cable length per device is 2 meters
No more than 15 devices may be interconnected on one bus.

Installation A-5

A

Cables and Adapters

The HP-IB connector is compatible with the connectors on the following cables
and adapter.
HP-IB Cable, 10833A, 1 m (3.3 ft.)
HP-IB Cable, 10833B, 2 m (6.6 ft.)
HP-IB Cable, 10833C, 4 m (13.2 ft.)
HP-IB Cable, 10833D, 0.5 m (1.6 ft.)
HP-IB Adapter, 10834A, 2.3 cm. extender.

Connector

The following gure shows the connector and pin assignments.
Connector Part Number: 1251-0293

Caution

A-6 Installation

Figure A-2. HP-IB Connector
HP products delivered now are equipped with connectors
having ISO metric-threaded lock screws and stud mounts (ISO
M3.5x0.6) that are black in color. Earlier connectors may have
lock screws and stud mounts with English- threaded lock screws
and stud mounts (6-32 UNC) that have a shiny nickel nish.

Caution

It is recommended that you do not stack more than three
connectors, one on top of the other.
Hand-tighten the connector lock screws. Do not use a
screwdriver.

HP-IB Logic Levels

The HP 8153A HP-IB lines use standard TTL logic, as follows:
True = Low = digital ground or 0Vdc to 0.4Vdc
False = High = open or 2.5Vdc to 5Vdc
All HP-IB lines have LOW assertion states. High states are held at 3.0Vdc by
pull-ups within the instrument. When a line functions as an input, it requires
approximately 3.2mA to pull it low through a closure to digital ground. When
a line functions as an output, it will sink up to 48mA in the low state and
approximately 0.6mA in the high state.

Note

The HP-IB line screens are not isolated from ground.

Removing and Fitting Modules

The unit can t two single width modules, or one double width module.

How to Remove a Module
Caution

Do not use the electrical or optical connectors to pull the
module out of the instrument, as this can cause damage to the
connectors.
Make sure that the line power is switched o before you
remove a module.

Installation A-7

A

A

Figure A-3. How to Remove a Module
1. Lift the catch at the bottom front of the module.
2. With the catch lifted, pull the module out of the instrument. If the module
does not slide out freely, check that you have lifted the catch high enough.

How to Fit a Module
Caution

A-8 Installation

Do not use the electrical or optical connectors to push the
module into the instrument, as this can cause damage to the
connectors.
Make sure that the line power is switched o before you t a
module.

A

Figure A-4. Fitting a Module
1. Position the module at an unoccupied slot, with the catch at the bottom front
of the module.
2. Insert the module into the slot and onto the tracks. If the module does
not slide in freely, check that you have correctly positioned and correctly
oriented it and that there is no obstruction to its movement.
3. Apply pressure to the front panel, and push the module as far as it goes. You
hear a small click when the module reaches its installed position. This is the
catch making contact.

Storage and Shipment

The instrument can be stored or shipped at temperatures between 040 C and
+70 C. The instrument should be protected from temperature extremes that
may cause condensation within it.

Installation A-9

A

Claims and Repackaging

If physical damage is evident or if the instrument does not meet speci cation
when received, notify the carrier and the nearest Hewlett-Packard Service
Oce. The Sales/Service Oce will arrange for repair or replacement of the
unit without waiting for settlement of the claim against the carrier.

Return Shipments to HP

If the instrument is to be shipped to a Hewlett-Packard Sales/Service Oce,
attach a tag showing owner, return address, model number and full serial
number and the type of service required.
The original shipping carton and packing material may be reusable, but
the Hewlett-Packard Sales/Service Oce will provide information and
recommendation on materials to be used if the original packing is no longer
available or reusable. General instructions for repacking are as follows:
1. Wrap instrument in heavy paper or plastic.
2. Use strong shipping container. A double wall carton made of 350- pound test
material is adequate.
3. Use enough shock absorbing material (3 to 4 inch layer) around all sides
of the instrument to provide a rm cushion and prevent movement inside
container. Protect control panel with cardboard.
4. Seal shipping container securely.
5. Mark shipping container FRAGILE to encourage careful handling.
6. In any correspondence, refer to instrument by model number and serial
number.

A-10 Installation

B
Accessories

B

Mainframe
Model No.
HP 8163A
Option 907
Option 908
Option 916
Option 050
Option 051

Mainframe
Description
Mainframe
Front Handle Kit
Rack Flange Kit
Additional Operating and
Programming Manual
DC Input 12V to 30Vy
DC Power Cable (5m unterminated)z

y If DC Power Cable required, order Option 051 as well.
z requires Option 050

Accessories B-1

Modules
Model No.

Power Sensor Modules
Description

HP 81530A*
HP 81536A*
HP 81531A*
HP 81532A*
Option 916

+3 to -110dBm, Si, 450-1020nm
+3 to -70dBm, InGaAs, 800-1700nm
+3 to -90dBm, InGaAs, 800-1700nm
+3 to -110dBm, InGaAs, 800-1700nm
Additional Operating and
Programming Manual
* Requires a connector interface (see below)

B

Model No.

Laser Source Modules
Description

HP 81551SM*
HP 81552SM*
HP 81553SM*
HP 81554SM*
Option 916

850nm center wavelength, multimode
1310nm center wavelength, single-mode
1550nm center wavelength, single-mode
1310/1550 single-mode
Additional Operating and
Programming Manual
* Requires a connector interface (see below)

Optical Head Interface Module
Model No.
Description
HP 81533A
Option 916

850nm center wavelength, multimode
Additional Operating and
Programming Manual

The Optical Head Interface connects to the optical heads HP 81520A, HP
81521B, and HP 81522A.
B-2 Accessories

Connector Interfaces and Other Accessories
High Return Loss Interface
Model No.
Description
HP 81000RI

High Return Loss Interface

B

Connector Interface
Model No.
Description
HP 81000AI
HP 81000FI
HP 81000JI
HP 81000SI
HP 81000VI
HP 81000WI

Diamond HMS-10/HP
FC/PC
SMA
DIN 47256
ST
Biconic

Bare Fiber Adapter
Model No.
Description
HP 81000AB
HP 81000FB
HP 81000VB
HP 81000WB

Caution

Diamond HMS-10/HP
FC/PC
ST
Biconic

When you are using a bare ber adapter, make sure that
the ber is correctly clamped. If the ber protrudes too far,
the ber end can become easily damaged, or it can damage
connectors to which you attach it.

Interactive Test Generator
Model No.
Description
E2020B

Interactive Test Generator IIy

Accessories B-3

y This is a general instrument driver library which includes a HP 8153A driver.

The version listed supports Windows languages and applications on the PC,
as well as having tools for graphics mathematical analysis and le-I/O. We
recommend that with this product you use Instrument BASIC for Windows
(E2200A), and the HP 82335I HP-IB Interface Card.

B

B-4 Accessories

C
Speci cations
The HP 8153A is produced to the ISO 9001 international quality system standard
as part of HP's commitment to continually increasing customer satisfaction
through improved quality control.
Speci cations describe the instrument's warranted performance. Supplementary
performance characteristics describe the instrument's non-warranted typical
performance.
Because of the modular nature of the instrument, the performance
speci cations apply to the modules rather than the mainframe unit. The
speci cations for a module are supplied with it. You should insert the
appropriate pages into this section of the manual.

Mainframe Speci cations

The mainframe has a dual channel display. For each channel there is a main
display with six digits and an auxiliary display with eight characters.

Speci cations C-1

C

Display ranges

Power +30 to -110dBm or 1000.00mW to 0.01pW
Calibration factor 6200.000dB
Reference 6200.000dBm/dB
Data Acquisition

C

Memory 500 measurement results/channel
(Data acquisition time 20ms/measurement result)
Selectable data averaging time 20ms to 60 minutes
Selectable total data averaging time 20ms to 99:59:59h
Environmental

Storage temperature -40 C to +75 C
Operating temperature 0 C to +55 C
Humidity <95% R.H. from 0 C to +40 C
Power
AC 100 to 240Vrms610%, 50 to 60Hz, 55VA max.
Dimensions
89mm H, 212.3mm W, 355mm D (3.5"28.36"214.0")
Weight
net 2.5kg (5.5lbs), shipping 4.5kg (9.9lbs)
HP-IB interface

Function code SH1, AH1, T6, L4, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1, DT1, CO, E2
SCPI command set
HP-IB capability modes and parameters can be programmed
Transfer time 20ms for one measurement result
<800ms for 100 measurement results out of memory

C-2 Speci cations

Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer: Hewlett-Packard GmbH

Optical Communication Measurement
Herrenberger Strae 110 .. 140
D-71034 Boblingen

Germany

declares that the product with modules as follows:
HP 8153A
HP 81520A
HP 81521B
HP 81524A
HP 81525A
HP 81530A
HP 81531A
HP 81532A
HP 81533B
HP 81534A
HP 81536A
HP 81541MM
HP 81542MM
HP 81551MM
HP 81552SM
HP 81553SM
HP 81554SM

Lightwave Multimeter Mainframe
Si Optical Head, 5mm
Ge Optical Head, 5mm
InGaAs Optical Head, 5mm
High Power InGaAs Optical Head, 5mm
Power Sensor Module
Power Sensor Module
Power Sensor Module
Interface Module for 8153A
Return Loss Module
Power Sensor Module
LED Source Module 850nm
LED Source Module 1300nm
Laser Source Module 850nm
Laser Source Module 1310nm
Laser Source Module 1550nm
Laser Source Module 1310/1550nm

C

conforms to the following standards:
Safety:

IEC 1010-1:1990 HD 401 S1:1980
incl. Adm.1:1992 EN 61010:1993

EMC:

EN 55011:1990/CISPR 11 Group 1 Class B 1
EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 ESD
4 kV cd, 8 kV ad
IEC 801-3:1992 Radiated Immunity 3 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 Fast Transients
0.5 kV, 1 kV
Speci cations C-3

1

The product was tested in a typical con guration with HP systems (Type test).

Supplementary Information:

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the
Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC), and the
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC).
The product also conforms to other standards not listed here. If you need
further information on conformity with particular standards, please contact
your local Hewlett-Packard Representative.

C

Boblingen,

March 13, 1992
updated: April 15, 1996
updated: November 30, 1998

C-4 Speci cations

Hans Baisch
BID Regulations Consultant
Wolfgang Fenske
TMO-B Regulations
Consultant

Acoustic Noise Emission

For ambient temperature up to 30 C
LpA = 42.5dB
Typical 0perator position,
normal operation.
Data are results from type tests per ISO 6081.


Gerauschemissionswerte:

Bei einer Umgebungstemperatur bis 30 C
LpA = 42.5dB
am Arbeitsplatz,
normaler Betrieb.

C

Angabe ist das Ergebnis einer Typenprufung

nach DIN 45635 Teil 19.

Speci cations C-5

D
Function Tests
Introduction

The procedures in this section test the electrical function of the instrument.
The complete speci cations to which the HP8153A is tested are given in
Appendix C. All tests can be performed without access to the interior of the
instrument.

D

Equipment Required

Equipment required for the Function Test is listed in the table below. Any
equipment which satis es the critical speci cations given in the table may be
substituted for recommended models.

Recommended Test Equipment

A. Head Adapter Module
Optical Head
Test/Cal Box
Head Recognition Adapter
Digital Multimeter with Test Leads
Test Cable
Oscilloscope
OR
B. Sensor Module

HP 81533A
HP 81520A or HP 81521B
P/N 08152-63201
P/N 08152-63211
HP 3466A
P/N 08153-61610
HP 81530/1/2/6A

Function Tests D-1

Test Record

Results of the Function Test may be tabulated on the Test Record provided at
the end of the test procedures. It is recommended that you ll out the Test
Record and refer to it while doing the test. Since the test limits and setup
information are printed on the Test Record for easy reference, the record can
be also be used as an abbreviated test procedure (if you are familiar with test
procedures). The Test Record can also be used as a permanent record and may
be reproduced without written permission from Hewlett-Packard.

Test Failure
D

If the HP8153A fails any Function Test, return the instrument to the nearest
Hewlett-Packard Sales/Service Oce for repair.

Instruments Speci cations

Speci cations are the characteristics of the instrument which are certi ed.
These speci cations, listed in Appendix C are the limits against which the
HP8153A can be tested. Appendix C also lists some supplemental characteristics
of the HP8153A and should be considered as additional information.
Any changes in the speci cations due to manufacturing changes, design, or
traceability to the National Institute of Standards and Technology will be
covered in a manual change supplement or revised manual. The speci cations
listed here supersede any previously published.

D-2 Function Tests

IA. Function Test Using the HP 81533A

The Function Test given in this section is using the HP 81533A Optical Head
Interface Module and the 08152-63201 Test/Cal Box to check voltages and
signals from and to the HP8153A Multimeter Mainframe.

Note

If you do not have an HP 81533A or a Test/Cal Box, it is possible
to perform the function test with other modules. Go to \IB.
Function Test using a HP 81530/31/32 or HP 81536A".

Perform each step in the tests in the order they are given using the
corresponding test equipment.

Display Function and Module Interface Tests
Display Function Tests

1. Insert the HP81533A into the Multimeter channel A position and connect
the Test/Cal Box to the HP8153A Input.
2. Make sure that the Head Recognition Adapter is connected to the Test/Cal
Box.
3. Turn power on and check that all display segments are lit for approx. 2
seconds and the HP8153A displays E 3200 HEAD-DAT SELFTEST.
4. Press any key on the HP8153A to overwrite the error message.
5. Press the [Param] key until PARAM= CAL is displayed.
6. Using the [Modify] keys check that the CAL factor can be changed
200.000dB to -200.000dB and set the CAL factor back to 0.000dB by holding
the [Param] key down for approx. 3 seconds.
7. Press the [Param] key until PARAM= T is displayed.
8. Using the [Modify] keys check that following measurement time settings can
be selected: 60, 30, 20, 15, 10, 5, 2, 1 minutes. 30, 20, 10, 5, 2, 1 seconds.
500, 200, 100, 50, 20 milliseconds.
9. Select display in [dBm] and press the [Param] key until PARAM= REF is
displayed.

Function Tests D-3

D

10. Check that the REF can be changed from 200.000dBm to -200.000dBm and
set REF back to 0.000dBm by holding the [Param] key down for approx. 3
seconds.
11. Press the [Param] key until  is displayed.
12. Check that  can be changed from 850nm to 1700nm and set  back to
1300nm by holding the [Param] key down for approx. 3 seconds.

Note

Perform the following tests with the HP 81533A rst in Channel
A and then in Channel B position.

Module Interface Tests

D

13. Using the Test Cable check the following DC levels at Test/Cal Box
receptacles:

+15V, -15V, P.CTRL, STATUS
+15Volt +15Volt 60.8Volt
-15Volt -15Volt 60.8Volt
P.CTRL 0Volt
STATUS 0Volt

Note

When performing the following tests each time after pressing
the switch on the Head Recognition Adapter ER 3200
HEAD-DAT will appear. To continue the tests or to repeat a test,
the error state must be overwritten by pressing any key on the
HP8153A front panel.

14. RANGE 0, RANGE 1
The states of RANGE 1 and RANGE 0 depend on the respective HP8153A
range settings. Check the status of the range selection signal on the RANGE
1 and RANGE 0 receptacles on the Test/Cal. Box.
Switch AUTOrange OFF) and select the ranges with the Up and Down keys.

D-4 Function Tests

HP8153A dBm RANGE RANGE 0 RANGE 1
0
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

H
H
H
H
H
L

H
H
L
L
L
L

Set the Oscilloscope as follows: Input to 2V/DIV, DC coupled, 1MOhm.
TIME/DIV to 0.005s/DIV; Sweep Mode to AUTO.
+5V
Using the Test Cable connect the +5V receptacle to the oscilloscope.
When pressing the switch on the Head Recognition Adapter, the +5V output
should switch from 0V to +5V and back to 0V after approx. 2s.
MODE 0 (MODE 1)
Connect the Test Cable from the MODE 0 (MODE 1) receptacle to the
oscilloscope.
When pressing the switch on the Head Recognition Adapter the MODE 0
(MODE 1) output should switch from 0V to approx.+5V and back to 0V
after approx. 2s.
CLOCK
Using the Test Cable connect the CLOCK receptacle to the oscilloscope.
When pressing the switch on the Head Recognition Adapter the CLOCK
output should show clock pulses for approx. 4 seconds, going from +5V to
0V.
OE
Using the Test Cable connect the OE receptacle to the oscilloscope.
When pressing the switch on the Head Recognition Adapter the OE output
should switch from + 5V to 0V and then back to + 5V.
ON/OFF
Set the Oscilloscope as follows: Input to 5V/DIV.
Using the Test Cable connect the ON/OFF receptacle to the oscilloscope.
Function Tests D-5

D

While the switch is pressed on the Head Recognition Adapter the ON/OFF
output should stay at + 15V. When releasing the switch, the level should be
approx. + 5V.

ANALOG INPUT (8152A IN)
20. In MEASure mode select Autoranging OFF and Display in W.
21. Connect the Test Cable (P/N 08153-61610) from the P.CTRL receptacle to the
BNC connector marked with 8152A IN on the Test/Cal Box and ZERO the
HP8153A.
22. Connect the Test Cable to the ON/OFF receptacle and select the -20dBm
range using the Up Down keys.
23. Check that the HP8153A display shows approx. 12.500.

D

P.CTRL
24. Change the input sensitivity of the oscilloscope to 0.05V/DIV and
25. Watch the DC level displayed on the oscilloscope and connect instead of the
Head Recognition Adapter the HP81520A or HP81521B Optical Head. 0
26. After a few seconds, the P.CTRL voltage should change from approx. 150
mV to approx. 40 mV (HP81521B) or from approx. 130 mV to approx. 30
mV (HP81520A).

IB. Function Test using a HP 81530/31/32 or HP
81536A

Sensor Module. The Function Test given in this section is using the HP 81530A,
HP 81531A, HP 81532A, or HP 81536A Sensor Module to check the HP8153A
Multimeter Mainframe.

Note

If you have an HP 81533A and a Test/Cal Box, it is preferable to
perform the function test with these. Go to \IA. Function Test
Using the HP 81533A".

D-6 Function Tests

Perform each step in the tests in the order they are given using the
corresponding test equipment.
1. With the HP 8153A turned o , insert a Sensor Module into channel A. The
other channel should be empty.
2. Turn power on and check that all display segments are lit for approx.
2 seconds and no error message occurs. SELFTEST SELFTEST is then
displayed for less than half a second.
3. Press all the front panel keys in turn and watch the display. Except for the
channel key, either the display should change or you should hear a beep if
the key is functioning properly.
4. Cover the sensor input to avoid light input. The blue ferrule cap supplied is
not sucient to stop all light, you can put this cap on the ferrule and then
cover it with a nger.
5. Press zero and check that proper zeroing is performed: The message
Zeroing is displayed at the bottom of the display, and -- -- ashes above
it while zeroing takes place. The process should take about 20 seconds.
6. Switch o the instrument, remove the module from channel A and replace it
in channel B.
7. Switch the instrument on. After the selftest, leave it for 30 seconds or so (to
allow the Peltier Regulator to settle).
8. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for channel B.

HP-IB Interface Test (Optional)

For this test you will need a controller/computer with HP-IB capabilities.
1. Connect the HP 8153A to the controller via the HP-IB.
2. With the HP 8153A switched on, sent the *IDN? query to the instrument
from the controller.
3. Check that the RMT indicator is lit on the display. This indicates that the
instrument has received the query.
4. Read the reply from the HP 8153A. This should be a string of the form
HEWLETT-PACKARD, 8153A, 0, n.n, where n.n is the rmware revision of the
software.
Function Tests D-7

D

A short program is given below that does the sending and receiving described
above. This program is written in the BASIC 4.0 Language System used on HP
9000 series 200/300 computers.

D

10
20
30
40
50
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220

!---------------------------------------------------------------!
! HP 8153A HP-IB Function Test
!
!---------------------------------------------------------------!
! Definitions and Initializations
!
Mmadd=722
DIM String$[80]
!
CLEAR SCREEN
PRINT TABXY(5,10);"HP-IB Function Test"
!
! Send an IDN query and get the identification
!
OUTPUT Mmadd;"*IDN?"
ENTER Mmadd;String$
PRINT TABXY(10,12;"Identification : ";String$
!
END

D-8 Function Tests

Function Test for the HP 8153A

Page 1 of 4

Test Facility:
Report No.
Date
Customer
Tested By
Model

HP 8153A Mainframe

Serial No.

Ambient temperature

C

Options

Relative humidity

%

Firmware Rev.

Line frequency

Hz

Special Notes:

Function Tests D-9

D

Function Test for the HP 8153A

Page 2 of 4

Model HP 8153A Mainframe
No.
Date
Test
Channel A Channel B
No.
Test Description
Pass Fail Pass Fail
IA. Display Function and Module Interface Test
Tested with HP 81533A Module and Test/Cal Box
Display All segments for approx. 2sec.
E 3200 HEAD-DAT SELFTEST

D

CAL factor 200.000dB to -200.000dB
Meas. Time T 60minutes to 20ms
REFerence 200.000dBm to -200.000dBm
 850nm to 1700nm
+15Volt +15Volt 60.8Volt
-15Volt -15Volt 60.8Volt
P.CTRL 0Volt
STATUS 0Volt
RANGE 0 High: 0dBm to -40dBm range
Low: -50dBm range
RANGE 1 High: 0dBm to -10dBm ranges
Low: -20dBm to -50dBm ranges
+5VOLT
MODE 0
MODE 1
CLOCK
OE
ON/OFF
ANALOG IN

0V ! +5V ! 0V
0V ! +5V ! 0V
0V ! +5V ! 0V
Pulses from +5V to 0V
+5V ! 0V ! +5V
+5V ! +15V ! +5V
Display approx. 12.500

P.CTRL Peltier Regulation

D-10 Function Tests

Function Test for the HP 8153A

Page 3 of 4

Model HP 8153A Mainframe
No.
Date
Test
Channel A Channel B
No.
Test Description
Pass Fail Pass Fail
IB. Display Function and Module Interface Test
Tested with HP 81530/1/2/6A Module
All display segments on for approx. 2 sec.
All keys (except Chan)
Zero Zeroing Operation
II. HP-IB Function Test

D

Function Tests D-11

E
Cleaning Procedures
In general, whenever possible use physically contacting dry connectors. Fiber
connectors may be used dry or wet. Dry means without index matching
compound. If there is a need to use an index matching compound, use only HP
index matching oil (part number 8500-4922). Clean the connectors, interfaces
and bushings carefully each time after use.

Cleaning Materials
Lens Cleaning Paper
Special Cleaning Tips
Blow Brush
Adhesive Cleaning tape
Isopropyl Alcohol

HP P/N

9300-0761
9300-1351
9300-1131
15475-68701
Not available from HP. This should be available from
any local pharmaceutical supplier.

Pipe Cleaner

Cleaning Procedures E-1

E

Cleaning Fiber/Front-Panel Connectors

1. In order to clean the instrument front panel connector remove the connector
interface.
2. Apply some isopropyl alcohol to the lens cleaning paper and clean the
surface and the ferrule of the connectors.
3. Using a new dry piece of cleaning paper wipe the connector surface and
ferrule until they are dry and clean.
4. Lightly press the adhesive tape several times against the connector surface to
remove any remaining particles. After use store the tape in the container.
5. Protect the connector surface with a cap.

Cleaning Connector Interfaces
E

* Apply some isopropyl alcohol to the pipe cleaner and wash the inside of the
connector interface.
* Using a new dry pipe cleaner, dry the inside of the connector interface.
* Remove the brush part from the blow brush and blow air through the inside
of the interface to remove any remaining particles.

Note

If any index matching compound was used, use an ultrasonic
bath with isopropyl alcohol to clean the connector interfaces.

E-2 Cleaning Procedures

Cleaning Connector Bushings

As used on the HP 8158B and HP 81000AS/BS.
Normally the connector bushings require no cleaning. However, if it appears
that cleaning is necessary, use only the blow brush with the brush part
removed.

Caution

NEVER insert any cleaning tool into the bushing as this may
a ect the optical system.
NEVER use any index matching compound, cleaning uid or
cleaning spray.

Cleaning Detector Windows

As used on the HP 81520A and HP 81521B.
1. Use the blow brush to remove any particles from the surface.
2. Wipe the surface with cleaning paper or special cleaning tips.

Cleaning Lens Adapters
Caution

Do not use any cleaning uid or cleaning spray.

1. Using the blow brush, remove dust.
2. Wipe the surfaces with the special cleaning tips.

Cleaning Procedures E-3

E

Cleaning Detector Lens Interfaces

As used on the HP 81522A and HP 8140A and HP 8153A detector modules.
Normally, the lens interface can be cleaned by using the blow brush. If adhesive
dirt must be removed perform as follows:
1. Using the blow brush, remove the dust from the lens surface.
2. Press the special cleaning tip to the lens surface and rotate the tip.

Note

Use alcohol for cleaning only then when above procedure does
not help or if the dirt is caused by oil or fat.

E

E-4 Cleaning Procedures

F
Local Control Summary
4Chan5
4Mode5

(5, 4)5
+, *

4

4 5 4 5

selects the channel. Under remote operation, this key acts as
4Local5.
changes the operating mode.
select the character to edit.
edit the selected character.

Measure Mode

The mode-indicator shows MEAS. In measure mode, the function of key is shown
by the black legend on the key.
selects measurement-parameters.
4Param5

This is the wavelength value.
CAL This is a calibration o set.
T
This is the length of time over which a signal is averaged.
REF This parameter sets the reference-level.
ATT This parameter sets the attenuation of an output.
AUX This parameter sets the frequency of the modulation of the
output.
4Disp!Ref5
takes the input power-level and stores it as the reference.
4dB5
switches the display to show results in dB; with respect to the
reference stored for the channel; or, for an instrument with two
sensors, with respect to the power-level of the other channel.
4dBm/W5
changes the display to show results in dBm or in Watts.
4Zero5
removes any electrical o set in the sensor circuitry.
4N Dig5
selects the number of digits shown after the decimal point.
4Auto5
enables or disables automatic ranging for the result.
4Up5
selects the next higher range and disables automatic ranging.
4Down5
selects the next lower range and disables automatic ranging.

Local Control Summary F-1

F

Menu Mode

F

The mode-indicator shows MENU. In this mode the blue legends, above the keys,
show the commands available to the user.
4System5
changes the instrument to system mode.
4Loss5
starts the loss application.
4Record5
starts the record applications.
STABILTY Samples power over a speci ed period of time.
T_TOTAL
is total time.
AUTODUMP enables the automatic dump to the printer
or plotter.
LOGGING
Takes sample of the power in rapid succession.
SAMPLES
sets the number of samples that are to
be taken.
AUTODUMP
enables or disables the automatic
plotting or printing of the samples when
the application nishes.
START
works together with THRESHLD to
determine the conditions to be met
before the application starts.
THRESHLD
sets the threshold power that must be
crossed before the application starts.
MAN LOGG Takes a sample each time you press 4Exec5.
PLOT and
Dump the samples to a printer or plotter.
PRINT
AUTOSCAL enables or disables automatic scaling of the
plot.
Y_MIN
sets the minimum value on the y-axis of the
plot.
Y_MAX
sets the maximum value on the y-axis of
the plot.
COMMENT
is an eight character message printed on the
plot for identi cation.
4More5
gets you into the other applications. The full list of these applications
depends on the modules installed.
SHOW
Shows the samples on the display.
MAXIMUM
shows the maximum power-level sampled.
MINIMUM
shows the minimum power-level sampled.
DIFF
shows the di erence between the minimum
and maximum power- levels sampled.
AVERAGE
shows the mean average of the samples.
F-2 Local Control Summary

shows the rst of the samples taken. To
examine the rest of the samples, use the
Modify keys.
ALIGNMNT TYPE
sets whether the instrument automatically
records the maximum power-level, or the
user sets the maximum power-level.
DELTA
sets the range of power shown by the
graphic bar.
MAXPOWER sets the maximum power-level.
enables or disables the editing of parameters.
Runs or stops an application.
Pauses or continues an application.
selects the previous in a series of applications or parameters.
selects the next in a series of applications or parameters.
# 1

4Edit5
4Exec5
4Pause5
4Prev5
4Next5

System Mode

The mode-indicator shows MENU SYS at the top of the display.
RECALL
Recall a con guration that is stored in memory.
The module type is indicated by the last two numeric digits of
the product number.
The location where the con guration data is stored. This number
is displayed to the left of the arrow.
The channel is either the letter A or the letter B. It is displayed
to the right of the arrow.
STORE
Store a con guration into memory.
The module type is shown for the last data that was stored in
the selected location.
The channel is either the letter A or the letter B. It is displayed
to the left of the arrow.
The location where the con guration data will be stored is a
number between 1 and 9. This number is displayed to the right
of the arrow.
HPIB
Set the HP-IB parameters.
ADDRESS
to set the HP-IB address of the instrument.
MODE
to set the instrument to control or talk-only
operation.
Local Control Summary F-3

F

to set whether the instrument is to run in HP 8152A
compatible mode or not.
set the display parameters.
BRIGHT
sets the brightness of the display.
set the date and the time.
MM/DD/YY sets the date.
HH:MM:SS sets the time.
LANGUAGE

DISPLAY
DATETIME

F

F-4 Local Control Summary

G
HP 8153A HP-IB Command Summary
HP-IB Capabilities
Mnemonic

Function

SH1
AH1
T6
L4
SR1
RL1
PP0
DC1
DT1
C0
E2

Complete source handshake capability
Complete acceptor handshake capability
Basic talker; serial poll; unaddressed to talk if addressed to listen; no talk only
Basic listener; unaddressed to listen if addressed to talk; no listen only
Complete service request capability
Complete remote/local capability
No parallel poll capability
Device clear capability
Device trigger capability (accepted but ignored)
No controller capability
Tristate outputs (except the handshake lines)

G

Remote Operation G-1

Command
DAB
DCL

EOI
GET
GTL
IFC
LAG
LLO
MLA
MTA
PPC
PPD
PPE
PPU
PPOLL
REN
SDC
SPD
SPE
TAD
TCT
UNL
UNT

G

G-2 Remote Operation

HP-IB Bus Commands
Description
Treatment

Data byte
Device clear

End or identify
Group execute trigger
Go to local
Interface clear
Listen address group
Local lock out
My listen address
My talk address
Parallel poll con g.
Parallel poll disable
Parallel poll enable
Parallel poll uncon g.
Parallel poll
Remote enable
Selected device clear
Serial poll disable
Serial poll enable
Talk address
Take control
Unlisten
Untalk

Implemented as usual
Sets 8153 into reset state, see
section \The Parser"
End is treated as white space
Not implemented
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Not implemented
Transparent to the parser
See DCL
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser
Not implemented
Transparent to the parser
Transparent to the parser

Common Command Summary
Command
Function

*CLS
*ESE
*ESE?
*ESR?
*IDN?
*OPC
*OPC?
*RST
*SRE
*SRE?
*STB?
*TRG
*TST?
*WAI

Clear Status Command
Standard Event Status Enable Command
Standard Event Status Enable Query
Standard Event Status Register Query
Identi cation Query
Operation Complete Command
Operation Complete Query
Reset Command
Service Request Enable Command
Service Request Enable Query
Read Status Byte Query
Trigger Command
Self Test Query
Wait Command

Command Summary
Command Parameter
ABORt[1j2]

ABORt

Command Summary
Command Parameter Note
DISPlay

DISPlay
:BRIGhtness 
w/o unit
:BRIGhtness?
[:STATe]

[:STATe]?

Command Summary
Command Parameter
FETCh[1j2]

FETCh

G

[:SCALar]

:POWER
[:DC]?

Remote Operation G-3

INITiate Command

Command

Summary
Parameter

INITiate[1j2]
[:IMMediate]
:CONTinuous 
:CONTinuous?
PROGram

Command
PROGram[1j2]

:[:SELected]
:EXECute
:NAME
:NAME?
:NUMBer
:NUMBer?
:STATe
:STATe?

Command Summary
Parameter

Note


,

CONTinuejPAUSejRUNjSTOPj0j1j2j3

The Logging Application
application
LOGGING

Parameters
G

varname = SAMPLES
1  value  500
varname = LOGGSTART
value = 1j2j3 where
1
means start when the input power-level is above threshold.
2
means start when the input power-level is below threshold.
3
means start immediately.
G-4 Remote Operation

varname = THRESHOLD
-400.00  value  400.00

Results
varname = ASAMPLES
varname = RESULT

The Stability Application
application
STABILITY

Parameters
varname = T_TOTAL
0  value  359,999

Results
varname = ASAMPLES
varname = RESULT

Command Summary
Command Parameter
READ[1j2]

READ

[:SCALar]

G

:POWER
[:DC]?

Remote Operation G-5

Command

G

SENSe

SENSe[1j2]
:POWer
:ATIME
:ATIME?
:RANGe
[:UPPER]
[:UPPER]?
:AUTO
:AUTO?
:WAVElength
:WAVElength?
:REFerence
:REFerence?
:STATe
:STATe?
:RATIo
:RATIo?
:DISPlay
:UNIT
:UNIT?
:CORRection
:COLLect
:ZERO
:ZERO?
[:LOSS
[:INPut
[:MAGNitude]]]
[:MAGNitude]]]?

G-6 Remote Operation

Command Summary
Parameter

Note

[]
[]

[]
TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2,[]
TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2

TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2
TOAjTOBjTOREFj0j1j2


no query



cal factor
cal factor

Command Summary
Command
Parameter
SOURce[1j2]
SOURce

:AM
[:INTernal]
:FREQuency]
:FREQuency?
:POWer
:ATTenuation[1j2]
:ATTenuation[1j2]?
:STATe
:STATe?
:WAVElength
:WAVElength?

[]jCW
[]

UPPerjLOWerjBOTH

G

Remote Operation G-7

Table G-1. STATus Command Summary
Command
Parameter

z is being used as shorthand for

STATus
:OPERation z
:SETTling z
:LPELTier z
:HPELTier z
:MEASuring z
:POWer z
:TRIGger z
:POWer z
:CORRecting z
:ZERO z
:AVERaging z
:POWer z
:PROGram z
:

G

G-8 Remote Operation

z

:CONDition?
:ENABle
:ENABle?

[:EVENt]?
:NTRansition 
:NTRansition?
:PTRansition 

Table G-2. STATus Command Summary
Command
Parameter

z is being used as shorthand for

STATus
:QUEStionable z
:POWer z
:OVERRange z
:LCURRent z
:HCURRent z
:LMONitor z
:HMONitor z
:ENVTemp z
:ISUMmary z
:INSTrument [1j2]
:POWer z

:CONDition?
:ENABle
:ENABle?

[:EVENt]?
:NTRansition 
:NTRansition?
:PTRansition 

z

STATus:SOURce Command

Command

Summary
Parameter

STATus
:SOURce
:CONDition?
:ENABle
:ENABle?

[:EVENt]?
:NTRansition 
:NTRansition?
:PTRansition 
:PTRansition?

G

Remote Operation G-9

Command

Command Summary
Parameter

SYSTem

Note

SYSTem
:ERRor?
Query only
:DATE
,,
2 char. each/4 char. for year
:DATE?
:TIME
,,
2 char. each
:TIME?

G

G-10 Remote Operation

H
HP 8152A HP-IB Command Summary
The HP 8153A o ers you a compatibility mode where you can program the
instrument using the HP-IB commands for the HP8152A Average Power Meter.
A summary of this set of commands is given here. For more details refer to the
HP 8152A Operating and Programming manual. (HP part number 08152-90001).

Di erences
Note

Dissimilarities in hardware and the principles of local operation,
mean that in some cases di erences between the HP 8152A and
the HP 8153A in compatibility mode cannot be avoided.

1. The DB(MW) unit is no longer available. Use DBM instead.
2. In the standard parameter set, the AUTOranging is no longer set to o .
AUTOranging is set to on, this also means that the Range is not set to 0dBm.
3. The CAL? and WCAL? queries are no longer available.
4. The power reading can no longer be made by just reading a value from the
output queue. A query command must be sent to make a reading. Use the
FETCh query as described in the TMSL mode. An example of using FETCh is
given after this list.
5. When there is no sensor in one of the channels, the CH3 command sets the
System Error bit (bit 7) and the Parameter Error bit (bit 0) in the status
byte. The channel selection is not changed.
6. When an attempt is made to read the wavelength of a channel which has no
sensor, with the WVL? command, the response is unde ned.
7. The responses for the ERR? and LERR? queries are
Remote Operation H-1

H

100
Zero failed, channel A.
142
Head read error, channel A.
200
Zero failed, channel B.
242
Head read error, channel B.
8. Avoid altering parameters under local control when the instrument is also
being controlled over the HP-IB in compatibility mode. It is possible to alter
the parameters in such a way that the instrument no longer behaves like an
HP 8152A.

Note

When in compatibility mode, altering the units (dBm, dB, Watts)
under local control will not change the units used under remote
control.

9. On the occurance of a syntax error in compatibility mode, the parser
resynchronizes at the start of the next line. Any commands following
the syntax error on the same line, will be ignored. The HP 8152A
resynchronizes on the next command that it recognizes.
Example
Two lines in a program are:
CH1;Q1;CH2;U1
CH?

The Q1 command will cause a syntax error.
The HP 8152A selects channel A. After the syntax error it
continues with selecting channel B and setting the units
there to Watts. It will respond with 2 to the query.
The HP 8153A in compatibility mode selects channel A.
After the syntax error the rest of the line is ignored. It will
respond with 1 to the query.
10. The setting for the instrument in compatibility mode is not stored in the
battery backed up memory.

H
H-2 Remote Operation

Using the FETCh Command - An Example

This example is a subroutine to take a reading from the second channel of the
power meter. The original program, as written for the HP 8152A is given on the
left. The modi ed program, to run on the HP 8153A (in HP8152A Compatibility
mode), is given on the right.
Old Program (HP 8152A)

.... .
1300 SUB Single_meas(P$)
1310 CLEAR Pmm
1320 OUTPUT Pmm;"CSB"
1330 OUTPUT Pmm;"WVL 2,1301NM;M2;CH2;U1;T1;AR1"
1340 TRIGGER Pmm
1350 S=SPOLL(Pmm)
1360 IF BIT(S,2)=0 THEN GOTO 1350
1370 ENTER Pmm;P$
1380 OUTPUT Pmm;"CSB"
1390 LOCAL Pmm
1400 SUBEND
.... .

Note
Line No.
1300
1310
1320
1330
1340
1350, 1360
1365

New Program (HP 8153A)

.... .
1300 SUB Single_meas(P$)
1310 CLEAR Pmm
1320 OUTPUT Pmm;"CSB"
1330 OUTPUT Pmm;"WVL 2,1301NM;M2;CH2;U1;T1;AR1"
1340 TRIGGER Pmm
1350 S=SPOLL(Pmm)
1360 IF BIT(S,2)=0 THEN GOTO 1350
1365 OUTPUT Pmm;"FETC:POW?"
1370 ENTER Pmm;P$
1380 OUTPUT Pmm;"CSB"
1390 LOCAL Pmm
1400 SUBEND
.... .

Do not specify a channel as part of the FETCh command, that
is, the syntax for the command in the compatibility mode is
FETCh[:SCALar]:POWer[:DC]?
Declares the subroutine. P$ is the string in which the reading is
returned to the calling program.
Clears all the HP-IB bu ers. (Pmm is the HP-IB address of the
instrument)
Clears the Status Byte in the instrument.
Sets up the instrument: Sets the wavelength for channel 2 to
1301nm; select MEASure mode; select channel 2; select dBm as
the units; set the trigger on; enable autoranging.
Trigger the instrument.
Performs a serial poll of the instrument, until bit 2 in the Status
Byte is set.
This is the extra command required by the HP 8153A when in
HP 8152A compatibility mode to read a value
Remote Operation H-3

H

1370
1390, 1400

Read the value.
Return the instrument to local state, and leave the subroutine.

Setting the Filter

The lter command on the HP 8152A selects between a 2Hz ( lter ON) and an
8Hz (Filter OFF) low pass lter.
This lter is not available on the HP 8153A. The lter command in HP 8152A
Compatibility mode selects between an averaging time of 500ms ( lter ON) and
an averaging time of 200ms ( lter OFF).
Switching the instrument into HP 8152A Compatibility mode, does not alter the
averaging time. You should use *RST, or a lter ON or OFF command to set the
averaging time to 500ms or 200ms.

H
H-4 Remote Operation

Listener Function
Settings
Parameter/Operation Mnemonic Data Unit Comment
Select SET Mode
Select MEASure Mode

M
M

1
2

Select Channel A
Select Channel B
Select B/A Operation

CH
CH
CH

1
2
3

Autoranging O
Autoranging On

AR
AR

0
1

Zero O
Zero On

ZER
ZER

0
1

H
Remote Operation H-5

Parameter/Operation Mnemonic

Filter O Settings
Filter On Settings

F
F
F
F
F
F

Data
1,0
2,0
3,0
1,1
2,1
3,1

Unit

Comment

Channel A
Channel B
B/A operation
Channel A
Channel B
B/A operation

Select dBm Units
Select Watts
Select dB Units

U
U
U

0
1
2

Select Trigger O
Select Trigger On

T
T

0
1

Set Channel A Range

RNG

1,

Set Channel B Range

RNG

Set Channel A 

WVL

Set Channel B 

WVL

Set CAL for Channel A
Set CAL for Channel B

CAL
CAL

1,
2,

Set REF for Channel A

REF

1, DBMj If no units are de ned
WjMWj default is determined by
UWjNWj the \U" command setting
PW

H
H-6 Remote Operation

continuous operation
single cycle operation

-90  value  +30,
head dependent
2, DBM -90  value  +30,
head dependent
DBM

Mj default unit
MMjUMj
NMjPM
2, Mj default unit
MMjUMj
NMjPM
1,

DB
DB

Parameter/Operation Mnemonic

Data

Unit

2, DBMj
WjMWj
UWjNWj
PW
3, DB

Comment

Set REF for Channel B

REF

Set REF for B/A Mode

REF

Set SRQ mask

SRE

Clear Status Byte

CSB

independent of SRQ state

Clear Device

CLR

Clears all input and output
bu ers.

Trigger

TRG



0  value  191, integer
a 1 in the binary equivalent
sets SRQ on this condition

Standard Parameter Set
Parameter/Operation Mnemonic
Recall Standard
Parameter Set

RST

Comment

The settings are as follows
Measure mode
Channel A
AUTOranging o
ZERO o
Filter o
Units dBm
Range 0dBm
Reference value 0dB/1mW
CAL factor 0dB
 head dependent

H
Remote Operation H-7

Talker Function
Interrogating Settings
Parameter/Operation

Learn Mode

Mnemonic

Comment

Returns 200-character string detailing
all settings. See below this table for
more details.
Interrogate Mode Setting
M?
Returns integer (1j2) for mode
settings
Interrogate Channel Setting
CH?
Returns integer (1j2j3)
for channel settings
Interrogate Autorange Setting
AR?
Returns integer (0j1) for
o /on
Interrogate Zero Setting
ZER?
Returns integer (0j1) for
o /on
Interrogate Units Setting
U?
Returns integer (0j1) for
o /on
Interrogate Trigger Setting
T?
Returns integer (0j1) for
for continuous or single cycle mode
Interrogate Filter Setting
F? 1j2j3 Returns integer (0j1) for
o /on for the selected channel
F?
Returns 3 integers separated by commas
for each of the lter settings
Interrogate Range Setting
RNG? 1j2 Returns a 7-character string for the
range for the selected channel
RNG?
Returns a 15-character string for the
range settings of both channels
Interrogate  Setting
WVL? 1j2 Returns an 11-character string for the
 for the selected channel
WVL?
Returns a 23-character string for the
 settings for both channels.

H
H-8 Remote Operation

LRN?

Parameter/Operation Mnemonic

Comment

Interrogate REF Setting REF? 1j2j3 Returns a 7-character string for REF
setting for the selected channel if
dBm or dB are the current units
Returns 11 characters if watts are the
current units
REF?
Returns a 23 character string for REF
setting for the selected channel if
dBm or dB are the current units
Returns 35 characters if watts are the
current units
The string for learn mode has the following format

Setting

Byte Position

Mode
1-4
Trigger
5-8
Units
9-12
AUTOranging
13-17
Channel
18-22
Filter A, B, B/A
23-28, 29-34, 35-40
Zero
41-46
SRQ mask
47-54
Range A, B
55-68, 69-82
CAL factor A, B
83-98, 97-110
REF value A, B, B/A 111-128, 129-146, 147-164
 A, B
165-182, 183-200

Length

4
4
4
5
5
6, 6, 6
6
8
14, 14
14, 14
18, 18, 18
18, 18

H
Remote Operation H-9

Status/Error Reporting
Parameter/Operation Mnemonic

Status Byte
Status Byte Mask
Condition Byte
Self-test
Error Number
Last Error Number
Operation Complete
Identi er

Comment

Returns 3-digit integer (000-191)
Returns 3-digit integer (000-191)
Returns 2-digit integer (00-63)
Executes self-test, returns 0 for pass
and 1 for fail
ERR?
Returns 3-digit integer representing error
code
LERR?
Returns 3-digit integer for last active error
This is a destructive readout.
OPC?
1 if no further commands to interpret and
execute in the input bu er
0 if further commands in the input bu er
IDN?
Returns 56-character string identifying currently
installed rmware, manufacturer, model no. and
serial number.
IDN?1 j2 Returns 26 character string identifying currently
installed rmware, manufacturerer, model no. and
serial number of channel A or B optical head.
STB?
SRE?
CNB?
TST?

Universal Commands
Command
Device Clear
Selected Device Clear
Group Execute Trigger

H
H-10 Remote Operation

ASCII Binary Octal Decimal
Character
DC4
EOT
BS

00010100 024
00000100 004
00001000 010

20
4
8

I

I
Error Codes
Local Operation Error Codes

Most of these errors are not fatal. You can use the instrument again by pressing
any of the front panel keys.

Module Related Errors
E 0101
E 0102
E 0103
E 0104
E 1xxx
E 3000
E 3100
E 3200
E 3300
E 3400
E 4001
E 4002
E 4004
E 4005
E 4006

Error in the low wavelength monitor current.
Error in the high wavelength monitor current.
Error in the low wavelength laser diode current.
Error in the high wavelength laser diode current.
LIGHT Error while zeroing. Digits marked x indicate the phase, loop
counter value, and hardware.
NO HEAD No head attached to the optical head interface module.
SETTLING Module not yet adjusted to temperature.
Checksum error in optical head data.
No memory to store the zero data (memory allocation failure).
NO HEAD Optical head removed during the zero operation.
MODULE Reading EEPROM failed.
MODULE EEPROM checksum error.
MODULE No acknowledge from EEPROM.
MODULE reading EPROM failed.
KEY JAM reading EPROM failed.

Error Codes I-1

I

Speci c Error Identi ers
E 4010
E 4020
E 4030

Input value exceeds limits
Input value below lower limit
Registers of the real time clock cannot be read from or written to.

Store and Recall Errors
E 4101
E 4102
E 4103
E 4105

CH EMPTY Store from or recall to an empty slot.
MISMATCH Attempt to recall source data into a sensor module, or

sensor data into a source module.
NO DATA Attempt to recall data from a location where no data has
been stored, or where the data is unintelligible.
MEM FAIL Memory checksum failed.

Plot, Print, Show, and Manual Logging Errors
E 4201
E 4202
E 4203

NO DATA There is no data for the application. Another cause could be

that there is not enough data for the results statistics to be calculated.
INVALID The data is invalid.
TLKONLY? Plot or print is not possible because the HP-IB is not set to
talk only mode.

Loss Errors
E 4301
E 4302

CONFIG The Loss application cannot run, because it needs both a

source and a sensor module.
CONFIG The Loss application cannot run, because it needs one of the
modules is already being used.

I-2 Error Codes

I

HP-IB Errors

These are fatal errors.
E 8100 Status open in HP 8153 language mode.
E 8110 Status open in HP 8152 language mode.
E 8120 Status open in command extension.
E 8200 HP-IB open in HP 8153 language mode.
E 8210 HP-IB open in HP 8152 language mode.
E 8220 HP-IB open in command extension.
E 8300 Macro open in HP 8153 language mode.
E 8301 Memory allocation failed.
E 8310 Macro open in HP 8152 language mode.
E 8400 Language processing terminated in HP 8153 language mode.
E 8410 Language processing terminated in HP 8152 language mode.

HP-IB Error Codes
No Error

This message indicates that there are no errors.
0
No error [OK; error queue is empty].

Instrument Speci c Errors

These error codes are all positive numbers.
110
Channel is empty.
120
Other channel is empty.
130
Commandnquery not available.
210
Logical parameter over ow [e.g. wavelength too small].
220
Invalid date information.
Error Codes I-3

I

310
410
510
610
620
630
640
710
720
730
740
810
820

Invalid reference mode [e.g. A/A].
Real time clock error.
Head connection error [head not connected].
Error in the low wavelength laser diode current in channel A.
Error in the low wavelength laser diode current in channel B.
Error in the high wavelength laser diode current in channel A.
Error in the high wavelength laser diode current in channel B.
Error in the low wavelength monitor current in channel A.
Error in the low wavelength monitor current in channel B.
Error in the high wavelength monitor current in channel A.
Error in the high wavelength monitor current in channel B.
Zeroing failed in channel A.
Zeroing failed in channel B.

Command Errors

These error codes have numbers in the range -199 to -100. They indicate a
syntax error has been detected by the parser, this could be
A syntax error.
A semantic error (unrecognized command)
A Group Execute Trigger (GET) was put in the input bu er inside a program
message.
The command error bit is set in the Event Status Register, see \*ESR?" in
Chapter 6.
-100
Command error [generic syntax or semantic error].
-101
Invalid character.
-102
Syntax error [unrecognized command or data type].
-103
Invalid separator.
-104
Data type error [e.g. numeric or string expected, got block data].
-105
GET not allowed.
I-4 Error Codes

I

-108
-109
-110
-111
-112
-113
-114
-120
-121
-123
-124
-128
-130
-131
-134
-138
-140
-141
-144
-148
-150
-151
-158
-160
-161
-168
-170
-171

Parameter not allowed [too many parameters].
Missing parameter [too few parameters].
Command header error.
Header separator error [whitespace, and nothing else, expected].
Mnemonic too long [maximum 12 characters].
Unde ned header [operation not allowed].
Header sux out of range.
Numeric data error [includes non-decimal numeric].
Invalid character in number [includes \9" in octal data, etc.]
Exponent too large [numeric over ow; exponent magnitude >32,767.
Too many digits [number too long; more than 255 digits received].
Numeric data not allowed.
Sux error.
Invalid sux [unrecognized units, or units not appropriate].
Sux too long.
Sux not allowed.
Character data error.
Invalid character data [bad character, or unrecognized].
Character data too long [maximum length is 12 characters].
Character data not allowed.
String data error.
Invalid string data [e.g., END received before close quote]
String data not allowed.
Block data error.
Invalid block data [e.g., END received before close quote]
Block data not allowed.
Expression error
Invalid expression [e.g, illegal character in expression]
Error Codes I-5

I

-178

Expression data not allowed.

Execution Errors

These error codes are in the range -299 to -200. They indicate that an error has
been detected by the part if the instrument that controls command execution.
Data is out of range.
The command could not be executed because of hardware limitations.
The Execution Error bit is set in the Event Status Register, see \*ESR?" in
Chapter 6.
-200
Execution error [generic].
-201
Invalid while in local [only available in remote, otherwise con ict with
hard local-control may result].
-202
Settings lost due to ???
-210
Trigger error.
-211
Trigger ignored [new trigger received before old data read]
-212
Arm ignored.
-213
Init ignored.
-214
Trigger deadlock.
-215
Arm deadlock.
-220
Parameter error.
-221
Settings con ict [uncoupled parameters].
-222
Data out of range [e.g. wavelength too high for this instrument].
-223
Too much data [out of memory; block, string, or expression too long].
-224
Illegal parameter value [used where exact value, from a list of
possibles, was expected].
-230
Data corrupt or stale [possibly invalid data; new reading started but
not completed since last access].
-231
Data questionable [measurement accuracy is suspect].
-240
Hardware error.
-241
Hardware missing [option not installed].
I-6 Error Codes

I

-260
-261
-280
-281
-282
-283
-284
-285
-286

Expression error.
Math error in expression [e.g., divide by zero]
Program error.
Cannot create program.
Illegal program name.
Illegal variable name.
Program currently running.
Program syntax error.
Program runtime error.

Device Dependant Errors

These error codes are in the range -399 to 300. They indicate a failure due to
an abnormal hardware or rmware condition. These codes are also used for
the results of the self-test. The Device Dependant Error bit is set in the Event
Status Register, see \*ESR?" in Chapter 6.
-300
Device dependent error [generic failure message].
-310
System error.
-311
Memory error [this message, or any in the range -319 to -310, may be
generated by checksum or parity errors].
-312
Protected user data memory lost [data no longer available].
-313
Calibration memory lost [out of calibration due to memory failure].
-314
Save/Recall memory lost [cannot complete *RCL request].
-315
Con guration memory lost.
-330
Self-test failed [more speci c data after \;"].
-350
Too many errors (more than 30) [error queue over ow].

Error Codes I-7

I

Query Errors

Query errors have codes in the range -499 to -400. they indicate that a problem
has been detected in the output queue. This could be
Trying to read from the queue when the queue is empty, or
Data lost from output queue.
The Query Error bit is set in the Event Status Register, see \*ESR?" in
Chapter 6.
-400
Query error.
-410
Query interrupted [query followed by a DAB or a GET before the
response was complete].
-420
Query unterminated [addressed to talk, incomplete program message
received].
-430
Query deadlocked [the input bu er and the output bu er are full;
cannot continue].
-440
Query unterminated after inde nite response [the inde nite response
is no the last request in the message unit].

I-8 Error Codes

J
Sales and Service Oces
Hewlett-Packard products are sold and supported through HP oces worldwide.
To contact the closest HP Sales and Service Oce, please check your telephone
directory, or contact on of the HP oces listed below.

Country

France

Sales and Service Oces
Address

Hewlett-Packard France
Z.A. de Courtaboeuf
1, av. du Canada
F-91947 Les Ulis Cedex

Germany Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Vertriebszentrum Sudwest

Schickardstrasse 2
D-7030 Boblingen

Italy
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via G.di Vittorio,9
I-20063 Cernusco S/N (Milano)
Japan
Yokogawa-Hewlett-Packard
1-27-15, Yabe
Sagamihara Kanagawa, 229
Spain
Hewlett-Packard Espanola,
~
S.A.
Crta. de la Coruna,
~
Km. 16,500,
E-28230 Las Rozas
Madrid

Tel.

(33/1) 69-82-60-60
(49/7031) 645
(39/2) 923-691
(81/427) 59-1311
(34/1) 6370011

Sales and Service Oces J-1

J

J

Sales and Service Oces (continued)
Country
Address
Tel.

United Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Kingdom King Street Lane
(44/734) 784-774
Winnersh, Wokingham
Berkshire RG11 5AR
United Hewlett-Packard Co.
States 120 W. Century Road (1/201) 599-5000
Paramus, NJ 07653

J-2 Sales and Service Oces

K
Backdating

K

Instruments with Serial Numbers 2946G00475 and
Earlier

The units on the y-axis of the graph are either dBm or dB. The plot or printout
is not scaled in Watts.

Backdating K-1

Instruments with Serial Numbers 2946G00225 and
Earlier
K

The Print Application

In the Print application the instrument takes the samples from a Stability or
Logging application and generates a printout of the samples. You can only
printout the samples from the most recent Stability or Logging or Manual
Logging application.
When you select the Print application the character eld shows PRINT. This
application has two parameters. SAMPLE sets the number of samples printed out.
COMMENT is an eight character message printed on the printout for identi cation.
Press 4Edit5 to look at, or edit the parameter. While you are editing a parameter,
the EDIT operation-indicator lights.
SAMPLES

When you select this parameter, the left side character eld shows the message
SAMPLES. The right side character eld shows the number of samples that will
be printed.
You edit the number of samples to be printed. The lower limit is 0. The
higher limit is 500. The displayed value is always the setting for the samples.
Press 4Edit5 when you have nished editing.
COMMENT

When you select this parameter the left side character eld shows the message
COMMENT. The right side character eld shows the comment string. The comment
string is included so that you can identify the printout.

Note

Other applications in the same channel share the COMMENT
parameter. Changing this parameter in the Print application
a ects the Plot application.

You edit the comment using the Modify keys. There are eight characters in
the comment and each of these can be a number (0 to 9), a math symbol (-,
+), a space, a letter (A to Z), or punctuation symbols (!, ?, ., ,, :, ;, &, |, @,
K-2 Backdating

#, $, %, *, [, ], , or !). The displayed characters are always the setting for
the comment.
You can press 4Edit5 if you have nished editing, or you can press 4Next5 or 4Prev5
to edit the other parameters.
The second page of the printout has a listing of the values of the samples from
the application.

Backdating K-3

K

Index

Index
1

# 1, 3-29
A

A/B, 2-8
Abbreviations
HP-IB Commands, 5-8
ABORt Command, 8-1, G-3
Acclimatizing Time, 2-10
acoustic noise, C-5
AC Power Source, iii, A-2
ADDRESS
Editing, 4-5
Air Circulation, A-5
Alignment Application, 3-29
Automatic or Manual, 3-30
Changing the Range of Values, 3-32
Maximum Value, 3-30, 3-31
Preparation, 3-29
Range of Values, 3-31
Running, 3-31
Tone O , 3-32
Tone On, 3-32
Alignment Application-Parameters
Editing, 3-30
ALIGNMNT, 3-30
Application, 9-3
Continue, 1-3, 9-4
Pause, 1-3, 9-4
Selecting, 9-2
Start, 9-2, 9-4
Stop, 9-4

Application Keys, 1-3
Applications-Parameters, 2-2
Editing, 9-3
Applications-Results, 9-3
Application Status, 7-13, 9-4
A/REF, 2-8, 2-9
ATT, 2-6
Editing, 2-6
AUTO, 2-13
AUTODUMP, 3-8, 3-11
Auto Key, 1-3, 2-12, 2-13
Automatic Ranging, 1-3, 2-13, 8-13
AUTOSCAL, 3-15, 3-20
Autotransformer, Using the
Instrument with an, iv, A-3
AUX, 2-7
Editing, 2-7
AVERAGE, 3-29
Averaging Status, 7-12
Averaging Time, 2-3, 2-3, 8-13
Editing, 2-3, 8-12
B

B/A, 2-8
Bar Graph, 1-7, 2-12
Beam Diameter, Laser, vi
+ Key, 1-2
( Key, 1-2
) Key, 1-2
* Key, 1-2
B/REF, 2-8, 2-9
BRIGHT
Index-1

Index

Editing, 4-7
C

Cabinet, Instrument in a, iii, A-1
CAL, 2-3
Editing, 2-3
Calibration Factor, 2-3, 8-12
Editing, 2-3, 8-11
CH=, 1-6
Chan Indicator, 1-6
Chan Key, 1-2, 2-1, 3-1
Channel
Selected, 1-6, 2-1
Selecting, 1-2, 2-1
Channel for Recall
Editing, 4-3
Channel for Store
Editing, 4-5
Character Field, 1-7
Chassis Earth Connection, iii, A-1
*CLS, 6-4
COMMENT, 3-16, 3-21, K-2
Common Commands, 6-1, 6-3, G-2
Common Status Registers, 6-1
Condition Register, 7-2, 7-4
Con guration, 1-3
Connectors
Electrical, A-7, A-8
HP-IB, A-6
Optical, A-7, A-8
Contents, Damaged, A-2
Contents, Incomplete, A-2
Cooling, A-5
D

Damage
Instrument, A-10
Damage, Instrument, A-2
Damage, Shipping Container, A-2
DATA ?, 3-16, 3-22
Date, 4-8, 8-27
Index-2

Editing, 4-8, 8-27
DATETIME, 4-7
dB Key, 1-3, 2-8
dBm, 1-3, 2-9
dBm/W Key, 1-3, 2-9
dB Units, 2-8
Decimal Places
Number Displayed, 1-3
Default Conditions
Line Power On, 1-8
Default Mode, 1-2
DELTA, 3-31
DIFF, 3-29
Display, 1-6
HP-IB Indicators, 5-2
On or O , 8-3
DISPLAY, 4-7
Display Brightness, 4-7, 8-2
Editing, 4-7
DISPlay Commands, 8-2, G-3
Display Parameters
Editing, 4-7
Display to Reference, 1-2, 8-18
Disp!Ref Key, 1-2, 2-7
Down Key, 1-3, 2-12, 2-13
E

Editing, 1-2, 2-14
Selecting a Digit, 1-2, 2-14
Units, 2-14
Edit Key, 1-3
Electrical Noise
Compensating for, 1-3
Enable Register, 7-2, 7-5
Error, 8-27
Error Messages, I-1
HP-IB, I-3
Instrument, I-1
Error Queue, 6-3
*ESE, 6-5
*ESE?, 6-6

Index

*ESR?, 6-6
Event Register, 7-2, 7-5
Event Status Enable, 6-5
Event Status Enable Register, 6-1,
6-6
Event Status Register, 6-1, 6-6
F

FETCh Command, 8-4, G-3
Fuse, iii, A-2
Fuse, Changing the, iii, A-2
H

HHMMSS
Editing, 4-8
HP 8152A Compatibility, 4-6, 5-3,
H-1
HP-IB, 5-1
References, 5-1
HPIB, 4-5
HP-IB Address, 5-8
Default, 5-8
Editing, 4-5
HP-IB Bus Commands, 5-4, G-1
HP-IB Cable, A-6
HP-IB Capabilities, 5-2, G-1
HP-IB Command Abbreviations, 5-8
HP-IB Connector, A-6
HP-IB Language, 5-3
Editing, 4-6
HP-IB Mode
Editing, 4-6
HP-IB Network, A-5
HP-IB Parameters
Editing, 4-5
HP-IB Signal Levels, A-7
Humidity
Operating, A-5

I

*IDN?, 6-7
IEEE-488, 6-1
Reference, 5-1
Initial Inspection, A-2
INITiate Commands, 8-7, G-3
Input Signals, v, A-5
Instrument Identi cation, 6-7
K

Key
Functions, 1-2
Keyboard, 1-2
Keys
Black, 1-2
Blue, 1-3
L

LANGUAGE
Editing, 4-6
Laser
Adjustment, vii
Enabling, vii
Malfunctioning, vii
Output Connector, vii
Laser Beam Diameter, vi
Laser Class, vi
Laser Diode Current, 7-17, 7-18
Laser Monitor Current, 7-18
Laser Numerical Aperture, vi
Laser Output Power, vi
Laser Radiation, vii
Laser Safety, vi
Warning Labels, vi
Laser Type, vi
Laser Wavelength, vi
Line Power Cable, iii, A-2
Line Power Consumption, iii, A-2
Line Power, Disconnection from, iii,
A-1
Line Power On, 1-8
Index-3

Index

Default Conditions, 1-8
Line Power Plug
Changing, v, A-4
Color Coding, v, A-4
Requirements, v, A-4
Line Power Socket, iv, A-3
Line Power Source, AC, iii, A-2
LOBATT, 1-6
Local Key, 2-1
Local Lockout, 5-2, 5-4, 9-1
Location for Recall
Editing, 4-3
Location for Store
Editing, 4-5
LOGGING, 3-10
Logging Application, 1-11, 3-10,
3-14, 3-19, 3-28, 9-5, K-2
Automatic Plot, 3-11
Automatic Printout, 3-11
Number of Samples, 3-10
Preparation, 3-6
Running, 3-13
Start Conditions, 3-12
Start Threshold, 3-12
Logging Application-Parameters
Editing, 3-10, 9-5
Logging Application-Results, 9-6
LOSS, 3-3
Loss Application, 3-2
Changing the Device Under Test,
3-4
Preparation, 3-2
Results, 3-4
Running, 3-3
Loss Key, 1-3, 3-2
Loss Measurement, 3-2
M

MAN LOGG, 3-13
Manual Logging Application, 3-13,
3-14, 3-19, 3-28, K-2
Index-4

Preparation, 3-6
Running, 3-13
Manual Ranging, 1-3, 2-13
Master Summary Status Bit, 6-13
MAV Bit, 6-3
MAXIMUM, 3-28
MAXPOWER, 3-31
Measurement Command, 5-3, 8-4,
8-8
Setting, 8-9
Measurement-Parameters, 3-2, 3-6,
3-9, 3-13, 3-30
Default Values, 2-2
Editing, 2-2
Selecting, 2-2
Measurement Parameters, 1-2
Measurement Range
Higher, 1-3
Lower, 1-3
Measure Mode, 1-2, 2-1, F-1
Keys, 1-2
Selecting, 3-1, 4-1
Measuring Status, 7-11
Menu Mode, 1-3, 3-1, F-2
Keys, 1-3
Selecting, 2-1
Message Available Bit, 6-3
MINIMUM, 3-28
MinMax Application
Running, 3-27
MM/DD/YY
Editing, 4-8
Mode
Selected, 1-6
Selecting, 1-2, 2-1, 3-1
MODE
Editing, 4-6
MODE=, 1-6
Mode Indicator, 1-6
Mode Key, 1-2, 2-1, 3-1, 4-1
Modify Keys, 1-2, 2-14

Index

Module
Fitting, A-8
Removing, A-7
Module Identi cation, 6-9
Module Type for Recall
Editing, 4-3
Module Type for Store
Editing, 4-5
More Applications
Selecting, 1-4, 3-28
More Key, 1-4, 3-28
MSS Bit, 6-13
Multi-Mode Cable, 2-10
N

N Dig Key, 1-3, 2-11
Next Key, 1-3, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10,
3-13, 3-14, 3-28, 3-30, 4-2
NO DATA, 3-16, 3-22
Node
Status Registers, 7-1
NR1, 5-10
NR2, 5-10
NR3, 5-11
NRf, 5-11
Numerical Aperture, Laser, vi
O

*OPC, 5-3, 6-8
*OPC?, 5-3, 6-9
Operating Environment, 2-9, A-4
Acclimatization, 2-10
Operating Humidity, A-5
Operating Temperature, 7-18, A-5
Operation Indicator, 1-7
*OPT?, 6-9
Optical Cable, vii
Outdoor Use, v, A-4
Output Connector, Laser, vii
Output Power, Laser, vi
Output Queue, 6-3

Output Signals, v, A-5
P

PARAM=, 1-7
Parameter Indicator, 1-7
Parameters
Editing, 2-14
Measurement, 1-2
Param Key, 1-2, 2-2
Parser, 5-3
Accepted Characters, 5-4
Operation, 5-3
Synchronization, 5-3
Parser Input Queue, 6-3
Clearing, 5-4
Pause Key, 1-3
Performance Tests, A-2
Plot
Automatic Scaling, 3-15
PLOT, 3-14
Plot Application, 1-13, 3-8, 3-11,

3-14

Preparation, 3-6, 3-14
Running, 3-16
The Plot, 3-16
Y Axis Maximum, 3-15
Y Axis Minimum, 3-15
Plot Application-Parameters
Editing, 3-14
Plot Identi cation
Comment Text, 3-16
Plotter, 3-6, 3-14
Power Measurement, 1-9
Power Reading Over Range, 7-17
Prev Key, 1-3, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 3-10,
3-13, 3-14, 3-28, 3-30, 4-2
PRINT, 3-19, K-2
Print Application, 3-8, 3-11, 3-19,
K-2
Automatic Scaling, 3-20
Comment Text, 3-21, K-2
Index-5

Index

Preparation, 3-6
Running, 3-22
Samples to Print, K-2
The Printout, 3-22
Y Axis Maximum, 3-21
Y Axis Minimum, 3-20
Print Application-Parameters
Editing, 3-19, K-2
Printer, 3-6
PROGram Commands, 9-1, G-4
Protective Earth, iii, iv, A-2, A-3
Protective Earth, Interrupting, iv,
A-3
Protective Earth Symbol, iii, A-1
R

Range, 1-3, 2-11, 2-13, 8-14, 8-16
Displaying, 2-12
Range Keys, 2-11
READ Command, 8-8, G-5
Recall, 4-2
Recall Parameters
Editing, 4-2
Record Application, 3-5
Record Applications
Selecting, 1-3, 3-7
Record Key, 1-3, 3-5
REF, 2-5
Editing, 2-5
Reference, 2-5, 8-17, 8-19, 8-20
Display to, 1-2, 2-7, 8-18
Editing, 2-5, 8-16
Other Channel as, 2-8, 8-20
Relative to, 2-8
Results Relative to, 1-3, 8-19
Setting, 1-2, 2-7
Reference Indicator, 1-7
Remote Control
Local Key, 2-1
Repacking, A-10
Request Service, 6-3
Index-6

Reset, 6-10
Reset State, 6-10
Result Field, 1-7, 2-11
Return Shipments, A-10
RMT, 1-6, 5-2
RQS, 6-3
*RST, 6-10
S

Safety Class, iii, A-1
Sales and Service Oces, J-1
Samples
Average Value, 3-18, 3-24, 3-29
Examining, 3-13, 3-28, 3-29
Maximum Value, 3-18, 3-24, 3-28
Minimum Value, 3-18, 3-24, 3-28
Range of Values, 3-18, 3-24, 3-29
Take Again, 3-13
SAMPLES, 3-10, K-2
SCPI, 5-6
Syntax, 5-6
SELFTEST, 1-8
Self-Test Command, 6-14
SENSe Commands, 8-9, G-5
Serial Poll, 6-3
Service Request, 6-3
Service Request Enable Register,
6-11, 6-12
Setting, Instrument
Recalling, 4-2
Settling
Peltier, 7-11
SHOW, 3-28
Show Application, 1-12, 3-28
Signals
Input, v, A-5
Output, v, A-5
Source
On or O , 7-21, 8-24, 8-25
Source Attenuation, 2-6, 8-24
Editing, 2-6, 8-24

Index

SOURce Commands, 8-22, G-6
Source Modulation, 2-7, 8-23
Editing, 2-7, 8-23
Speci cations, C-1
*SRE, 6-11
*SRE?, 6-12
SRQ, 1-6, 5-2, 6-3
Stability Application, 3-7, 3-14, 3-19,
3-28, 9-6, K-2
Automatic Plot, 3-8
Automatic Printout, 3-8
Preparation, 3-6
Running, 3-9
Total Time, 3-8
Stability Application-Parameters
Editing, 3-8, 9-6
Stability Application-Results, 9-6
STABILTY, 3-7
Standard Setting, 4-3
Recalling, 1-8, 4-2
START, 3-12
Status
Error, 7-13, 7-16, 7-19
Operational, 7-7, 7-10
Questionable, 7-13, 7-16
Source, 7-20
Status Byte Register, 6-1, 6-13
STATus Command, 6-13, 7-3
Status Registers, 6-4, 7-1
Clearing, 6-4
Common, 6-1
Setting, 7-3
Status Request Enable Register, 6-1
*STB?, 6-13
Storage, A-9
STORE, 4-4
Store Parameters
Editing, 4-4
Syntax Diagram
Conventions, 5-9
SYSTem Commands, 8-26, G-9

System Key, 1-3, 3-2, 4-2
System Mode, 4-1, F-3
Selecting, 3-2
System-Parameters
Selecting, 1-3
System Parameter-Sets
Selecting, 4-2
T

T, 2-3
Editing, 2-3
Talk Only, 1-13
Temperature
Cooling, A-5
Operating, A-5
Storage, A-9
Temperature Changes, A-5
THRESHLD, 3-12
Time, 4-8, 8-29
Editing, 4-8, 8-28
TLK ONLY, 1-6, 5-2
TMSL, 4-6, 5-6
Syntax, 5-6
Transition Filter
Negative, 7-2, 7-6
Positive, 7-2, 7-6, 7-7
*TRG, 6-14
Trigger
Continuous, 8-4, 8-7
Immediate, 8-4, 8-7, 8-8
Trigger Command, 5-3, 6-14, 8-1, 8-7
Trigger Status, 7-12
*TST?, 6-14
T TOTAL, 3-8
Two Sensor Instrument, 2-8
TYPE, 3-30
U

Units, 8-21
Selecting, 1-3, 8-21
Up Key, 1-3, 2-12, 2-13
Index-7

Index

W

*WAI, 5-3, 6-14
Wait Command, 6-14
Warm-Up Time, 2-10
Watts, 1-3, 2-9
Editing, 2-14
Wavelength, 2-2, 8-26
Editing, 2-2, 8-21, 8-22, 8-25
Laser, vi

Index-8

Y

Y MAX, 3-15, 3-21
Y MIN, 3-15, 3-20
Z

ZERO ERR, 2-10
Zeroing, 1-3, 1-9, 2-9, 5-3, 8-11
Zeroing Error, 2-10
Zero Key, 1-3, 2-9
Zero Status, 7-12



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 1999:08:12 14:09:00Z
Creator                         : philip@hpbidap0 /usr/contrib/hptag/122/bin/cdsdvips v. A.01.-
Modify Date                     : 2005:08:06 09:52:40-06:00
Page Count                      : 288
Has XFA                         : No
Creation Date                   : 1999:08:12 14:09:00Z
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 3.01 for Windows
Mod Date                        : 2005:08:06 09:52:40-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2005:08:06 09:52:40-06:00
Title                           : /users/philip/multimtr/chaps.dvi
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu